HANDBOOK

PEUGEOT 308 Access to the Handbook

The Handbook is available on the PEUGEOT website, in the "MY PEUGEOT" section or at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/

Select: From the appropriate Store, download the Scan - the language, MyPeugeot APP smartphone application. - the vehicle, its body style, - the issue period of your handbook corresponding to the date of 1st Then select: registration of your vehicle. - the vehicle, - the issue period corresponding to the date of 1st registration of your vehicle. Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook. Access to the Handbook.

This symbol indicates the latest information available. Welcome Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 308. Key Safety warning This document presents the information and recommendations required for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. Additional information

Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in Contributes to the protection of the environment this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it was sold. Left-hand drive vehicle The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical data, Right-hand drive vehicle equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the guide. Location of the equipment/button described with a black zone If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is passed on to the new owner.

In this document you will find all of the instructions and recommendations on use that will allow you to enjoy your vehicle to the fullest. It is strongly recommended that you familiarise yourself with it as well as the Warranty and Maintenance Record which will provide you with information about warranties, servicing and roadside assistance associated with your vehicle.

1 Contents

Overview . Access Lighting and visibility Instruments and controls 4 Setting the time and date 38 Exterior lighting control stalk 74 Remote control and key 39 Automatic illumination of headlamps 76 Keyless Entry and Starting 41 Automatic headlamp dipping 76 Eco-driving . Locking/unlocking from the inside 43 Guide-me-home lighting 78 Back-up procedures 44 Exterior welcome lighting 78 Doors 46 Direction indicators 79 Boot 47 Door mirror spotlamps 79 Alarm 48 Headlamp adjustment 79 Instruments Wiper control stalk 80 Instrument panel 8 Ease of use and comfort Changing a wiper blade 82 Warning and indicator lamps 9 Automatic windscreen wipers 83 Electric windows 50 Indicators 23 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 51 Distance recorders 27 Front head restraints 51 Lighting dimmer 28 Safety Front seats 51 rip computer 28 General safety recommendations 84 Steering wheel adjustment 55 Monochrome screen C 30 Hazard warning lamps 84 Mirrors 55 Touch screen 32 Emergency or assistance call 85 Rear seats (hatchback) 56 Horn 86 Rear seats (SW) 57 Electronic stability control (ESC) 86 Interior fittings 58 Seat belts 90 Boot fittings (hatchback) 62 Airbags 92 Boot fittings (SW) 62 Child seats 95 Heating and Ventilation 64 Child seat at the front 96 Manual air conditioning 66 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 99 Manual air conditioning (Touch screen) 66 ISOFIX mountings and child seats 102 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning (Touch screen) 67 Child lock 107 Recirculation of interior air 69 Front demist – defrost 70 Rear screen demist – defrost 70 Panoramic roof 71 Courtesy lamps 72 Footwell lighting 73 Interior ambient lighting 73 2 Contents .

Driving Practical information Technical data Driving recommendations 109 Fuel tank 170 Engine technical data and towed loads 221 Anti-theft protection 110 Diesel misfuel prevention 171 Petrol engines 222 Starting/Switching off the engine 110 Compatibility of fuels 172 Diesel engines 227 Manual parking brake 114 Snow chains 173 Dimensions 231 Electric parking brake 114 Very cold climate screen 173 Identification markings 233 Hill start assist 117 Towing device 174 5-speed manual gearbox 118 Towing device with quickly detachable towball (hatchback) 175 6-speed manual gearbox 118 Towing device with quickly detachable EAT6 automatic gearbox 119 towball (SW) 178 Audio equipment and telematics EAT8 automatic gearbox 122 Energy economy mode 181 . Driver Sport Pack 126 Load reduction mode 181 Bluetooth audio system Gear shift indicator 127 Fitting roof bars 182 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Stop & Start 128 Bonnet 182 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Memorising speeds 130 Engines 183 Speed Limit recognition and Checking levels 184 recommendation 131 Checks 186 Speed limiter 133 AdBlue® (BlueHDi engines) 188 Cruise control 135 Adaptive cruise control 138 Alphabetical index . Active Safety Brake with Distance Alert In the event of a breakdown and Intelligent emergency braking Tool kit 193 assistance 146 Temporary puncture repair kit 194 Access to additional videos Fatigue detection system 149 Spare wheel 201 Active Lane Keeping Assistance 150 Changing a bulb 205 Blind Spot Detection 154 Changing a fuse 211 Parking sensors 156 12 V battery 215 Reversing camera 158 Towing 218 Visiopark 1 158 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 220 Park Assist 161 Tyre under-inflation detection 166 bit.ly/helpPSA

3 Overview

Instruments and controls 1 8 Bonnet release USB port

2 9 Dashboard fuses Horn

3 10 Courtesy lamp Instrument panel Warning lamp display for seat belts and front passenger airbag Interior ambient lighting Rear view mirror Emergency and assistance call buttons

4 Monochrome screen with audio system Touch screen with PEUGEOT Connect Radio or PEUGEOT Connect Nav

5 Air conditioning controls

6 Stop & Start button Gearbox controls Driver Sport Pack

7 Manual parking brake Electric parking brake

4 Overview .

Steering mounted controls Side switch panel 4 Deactivation of the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring alarm

5 Headlamp beam height adjustment wheel

Central switch panel

1 External lighting/Direction 1 indicators control stalk Deactivation/Reactivation of DSC and ASR (versions 2 equipped with an audio system and GT/GTi versions) Wiper/Screenwash/Trip 1 computer control stalk 2 Hazard warning lamps switch 3 Deactivation/Reactivation of Stop & Start 2 Audio system setting controls 3 Locking/unlocking from inside control 4 Deactivation/Reactivation of Active Lane Keeping Assistance Speed limiter/Cruise control/Adaptive cruise control with Stop function controls

5 Eco-driving

Eco-driving

Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.

Optimise the use of your Drive smoothly Unless it has automatic regulation, switch off gearbox the air conditioning as soon as the desired temperature has been reached. Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, With a manual gearbox, move off gently Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls use engine braking rather than the and change up without waiting. When when not required, if they are not automatically brake pedal, and press the accelerator accelerating, change up early. controlled. progressively. These practices contribute Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. towards a reduction in fuel consumption and With an automatic or electronic gearbox, CO2 emissions and also help reduce the favour automatic mode and avoid pressing the background traffic noise. Switch off the headlamps and foglamps when accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. the ambient light level does not require their use. If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of The gear shift indicator invites you to engage the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) the most suitable gear: as soon as the Avoid running the engine before moving off, when the traffic is flowing well. indication is displayed in the instrument panel, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up follow it straight away. much faster while driving. For vehicles fitted with an electronic or Control the use of your electrical automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only equipment As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices (film, music, video game, in manual mode. Before moving off, if the passenger etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening consumption of electrical energy, and so of the windows and air vents before using the air fuel. conditioning. Disconnect your portable devices before Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leaving the vehicle. leave the air vents open. Consider using equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof blind, window blinds, etc.).

6 Eco-driving .

Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine consumption on maintenance oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and observe the schedule of operations in the Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, manufacturer's service schedule. the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, referring to the label in the door aperture, as close as possible to the rear seats. driver's side. With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and Carry out this check in particular: system is faulty, your vehicle becomes reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, - before a long journey, polluting. Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a - at each change of season, qualified workshop as soon as possible to roof box. - after a long period out of use. bring your vehicle’s nitrogen oxides emissions Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on back in line with the regulations. any trailer or caravan. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and When filling the tank, do not continue after the refit your summer tyres. 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.

For vehicles fitted with it, avoid using the At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only Dynamic Pack for too long, in order to limit after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres) your fuel consumption. that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

7 Instruments Display screen 5. Service indicator, then total distance Instrument panel recorder (miles or km). Speedometer These functions are displayed successively on switching on the ignition. 6. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).

When travelling abroad, you may have to change the distance unit: the display With display screen 2: of road speed must be in the official units (miles or km) for the country. The change of units is done via the screen configuration menu, with the vehicle stationary.

Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). With display screen 1: Instrument panel display screen: Coolant temperature and - Gear shift indicator. - State of the automatic gearbox. fuel level indicators - State of the speed limiter or cruise control. - Speed limit sign. - Total distance recorder. - Trip distance recorder. - Service spanner. According to the page selected with the control 1. Engine oil level indicator. stalk (end of the wiper control stalk): 2. Gear shift indicator. - Digital speedometer. State of the automatic gearbox. - Trip computer. 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). - Dynamic vehicle parameters (Driver Sport 4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. Pack). - Eco mode. 1. Fuel gauge. - Driving aids. 2. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge. - Repeat of the navigation instructions.

8 Instruments Temporary display: Rev counter When the ignition is switched on - Service indicator (when the ignition is switched on). Certain red or orange warning lamps come on 1 - Oil level indicator (when ignition first for a few seconds when the ignition is switched switched on, depending on version). on. These warning lamps should go off as soon - Range indicators related to the AdBlue and as the engine is started. to the SCR system. - Alert messages. Persistent warning lamp Control buttons When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of a red or orange warning lamp indicates a fault that needs further investigation, using any associated Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm). message and the description of the warning lamp in the documentation.

Warning and indicator lamps Where a warning lamp remains lit Displayed as symbols, visual indicators The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning A. General lighting dimmer. which inform the driver of the occurrence of a and indicator lamp description indicate whether malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating you should contact a qualified professional B. Reset the trip distance recorder or the status of a system (operation or deactivation in addition to the immediate recommended service indicator (according to context). indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in actions. two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several (1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do With display screen 2, pressing button colours. so and switch off the ignition. B briefly enables a manual CHECK to be performed (reminder of service due date, the Associated warnings (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified driving range for the AdBlue and the SCR The illumination of a lamp can be accompanied workshop. system for BlueHDi versions and current by an audible signal and/or a message (3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified alerts). displayed in a screen. workshop. Relating the type of alert to the operating status of the vehicle allows you to determine whether the situation is normal or a fault has occurred: refer to the description of each lamp for further information. 9 Instruments List of warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Red warning/indicator lamps STOP Fixed, associated with Indicates a serious fault with the Carry out (1) and then (2). another warning lamp, engine, braking system, power accompanied by the steering, automatic gearbox or a display of a message major electrical fault. and an audible signal.

Engine oil Fixed. There is a fault with the engine Carry out (1) and then (2). pressure lubrication system.

Brakes Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped Carry out (1), then top up with brake fluid that complies significantly. with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the problem persists, carry out (2).

Fixed. The electronic brake force distribution Carry out (1) and then (2). (EBFD) system is faulty. +

Parking brake Fixed. The parking brake is applied or not properly released.

Electric parking Flashing. The electric parking brake is not Carry out (1) on level ground (horizontally). brake applied automatically. - with a manual gearbox, with a gear engaged. The application/release is faulty. - with an automatic gearbox, with the lever in position P. Then carry out (2).

10 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Battery charge* Fixed. The battery charging circuit has a Carry out (1). fault (dirty terminals, slack or cut If the electric parking brake no longer works, alternator belt, etc.). immobilise the vehicle: F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. F With the EAT6 automatic gearbox, move the gear selector to position P. F With the EAT8 automatic gearbox, put the chock against one of the wheels. Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning lamp does not go off when the engine is started, carry out (2).

Door(s) open Fixed, associated with If one of the doors or the boot is not a message identifying fully closed (speed below 6 mph the door. [10 km/h]).

Fixed, associated with If one of the doors or the boot is not a message identifying fully closed (speed above 6 mph the door, together with [10 km/h]). an audible signal.

Seat belt not Fixed or flashing A seat belt has not been fastened or fastened/ accompanied by an has been unfastened. unfastened audible signal.

Low fuel level Fixed, with the needle When it first comes on, there remains Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. in the red zone. less than 6 litres of fuel in the tank. Never drive until completely empty, this could damage the emissions and injection systems.

* Depending on the country of sale. 11 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Orange warning/indicator lamps Engine self- Flashing. The engine management system has There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be diagnosis a fault. destroyed. Carry out (2) without fail. system Fixed. The emission control system has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is fault. started. Carry out (3) quickly.

Service Temporarily on. One or more minor faults have been Identify the cause of the fault using the message detected for which there is no specific displayed in the instrument panel. warning lamp. You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for example an open door or the start of saturation of the particle filter. For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre under-inflation detection system, carry out (3).

Fixed. One or more major faults have been Identify the cause of the anomaly using the message detected for which there is no specific displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3). warning lamp.

Fixed, accompanied Automatic release of the electric Carry out (2). by the message parking brake is unavailable. "Parking brake fault".

Service warning lamp The servicing interval has been Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines. fixed and service exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible. + spanner flashing then fixed.

12 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Malfunction (with Fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Carry out (3) quickly. electric parking brake)

Fixed, accompanied You can no longer immobilise the If manual application and release are not working, the by the message vehicle with the engine running. electric parking brake control lever is faulty. "Parking brake fault". The automatic functions must be used at all times and + are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever. Carry out (2).

Flashing, when the The parking brake has not been Carry out (1) and try to completely release the parking vehicle is started. properly released. brake using the control lever, with your foot on the brake pedal. + If the problem persists, carry out (2).

+

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

13 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Malfunction (with Fixed, accompanied by the The parking brake is not operating Make your vehicle safe: electric parking brake) message "Parking brake fault". at maximum efficiency to ensure F Park on a level surface. parking the vehicle in complete F With a manual gearbox, engage + safety in all situations. a gear. F With an automatic gearbox, with P selected, place the supplied + chocks against one of the wheels. + Then carry out (2).

Under-inflation Fixed, accompanied by an audible The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as signal and a message. is too low. soon as possible. Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the pressure.

Under-inflation warning lamp The system is faulty: tyre pressures As soon as possible, check the flashing then fixed and Service are no longer monitored. pressure of the tyres and carry out + warning lamp fixed. (3).

AdBlue® Fixed, on switching on the ignition, The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue® as soon as (access via the boot) accompanied by an audible signal between 1,500 and 375 miles possible, or carry out (3). and a message indicating the (2,400 and 600 km). remaining driving range.

14 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

® ® ® 1 AdBlue AdBlue warning lamp flashing The driving range is less than You must top up the AdBlue to (access via the boot) and Service warning lamp fixed, 375 miles (600 km). avoid a breakdown, or carry out + accompanied by an audible signal (3). and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

AdBlue® warning lamp flashing The AdBlue® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the and Service warning lamp fixed, starting inhibition system required AdBlue®, or carry out (2). accompanied by an audible signal by legislation prevents starting of It is essential to add at least 5 litres and a message indicating that the engine. of AdBlue® to its tank. starting is prevented.

AdBlue® On for around 30 seconds when The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue®. (access via the fuel starting the vehicle, accompanied between 1,500 and 500 miles filler flap) by a message indicating the (2,400 and 800 km). remaining driving range.

Fixed, on switching on the ignition, The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue® as soon as accompanied by an audible signal between 500 and 62 miles possible, or carry out (3). and a message indicating the (800 and 100 km). remaining driving range.

Flashing, accompanied by an audible The driving range is less than You must top up the AdBlue® to signal and a message indicating the 62 miles (100 km). avoid a breakdown, or carry out remaining driving range. (3).

Flashing, accompanied by an The AdBlue® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the audible signal and a message starting prevention system required AdBlue®, or carry out (2). indicating that starting is prevented. by legislation prevents starting of It is essential to add at least 5 litres the engine. of AdBlue® to its tank.

15 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

SCR emissions Fixed when the ignition is switched A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the control system on, accompanied by an audible signal control system has been detected. exhaust emissions return to normal + and a message. levels.

AdBlue® warning lamp flashing, on Depending on the message Carry out (3) as soon as possible to + switching on the ignition, associated displayed, you can continue driving avoid breaking down. with the fixed Service and engine for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied the engine starting prevention system by an audible signal and a message is triggered. indicating the remaining driving range.

AdBlue® warning lamp flashing, An engine immobiliser prevents To restart the engine, carry out (2). on switching on the ignition, the engine from restarting (over associated with the fixed Service and the authorised driving limit after engine diagnostic warning lamps, confirmation of a fault with the accompanied by an audible signal emissions control system). and a message.

Distance Alert/ Fixed, accompanied by a message. The system has been deactivated via Active Safety the vehicle configuration menu. Brake*

Flashing. The system is operating. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed of collision with the vehicle ahead.

Fixed, accompanied by a message The system has a fault. Carry out (3). and an audible signal.

* Only with display screen 2. 16 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Diesel engine pre- Temporarily on. When switching on the ignition, Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. heating if the weather conditions and With the ​Keyless Entry and Starting system, when the the engine temperature make it warning lamp goes off, starting is immediate if you necessary. press and hold: - the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox, - the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the indicator lamp goes off again, then start the engine.

Anti-lock braking Fixed. The anti-lock braking system The vehicle retains conventional braking. system (ABS) has a fault. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry out (3).

Dynamic stability Fixed. With audio system or GT/GTi These systems reactivate automatically above 31 mph control (DSC) versions: (50 km/h), except the GT/GTi versions, as well as and anti-slip The DSC/ASR systems have when the ignition is switched off. regulation (ASR) been disabled by a press of the To reactivate them below 31 mph (50 km/h), disable button. depending on the version, press the button again or go With touch screen, except GT/ to the Driving functions menu. GTi versions: The ASR system has been disabled via the Driving functions menu.

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

17 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Dynamic stability Flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is activated control (DSC) if there is a loss of grip or trajectory. and anti-slip regulation (ASR) Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3).

Emergency Fixed, accompanied Emergency braking does not have full If automatic release is not available, use manual brake anomaly by the message power. release. (with electric "Parking brake fault". + parking brake)

Airbags Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt Carry out (3). pretensioners is faulty.

Front passenger Fixed. The front passenger airbag is In this case, do NOT install a "rearward facing" airbag (ON) activated. child seat on the front passenger seat – Risk of The control is in the "ON" position. serious injury!

Front passenger Fixed. The front passenger airbag is You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, unless airbag (OFF) deactivated. there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp The control is in the "OFF" position. on).

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

18 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Deactivation of Fixed. The "automatic application" (on Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no the automatic switching off the engine) and longer possible. functions (with "automatic release" functions are The parking brake can be released manually. electric parking deactivated or faulty. brake) In the event of a fault, illumination of this warning lamp is accompanied by a warning message.

Automatic Fixed, accompanied The automatic application is not Use the electric parking brake control lever. application (with by the message available, the parking brake can only If automatic release is also not available, use manual electric parking "Parking brake fault". be used manually. release. + brake)

Malfunction (with Fixed, accompanied The parking brake is faulty: manual When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle: electric parking by the message and automatic functions may not be F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately 7 brake) "Parking brake fault". working. to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp comes on in + the instrument panel. If this procedure does not work, make your vehicle

safe: F Park on a level surface. + F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. F With an automatic gearbox, select P, then put the supplied chock against one of the wheels. Then carry out (2).

19 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Active Lane Fixed. The system is deactivated or on Keeping standby. Assistance Flashing. You are about to cross a broken The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory lane marking without operating the on the side of the lane marking detected. direction indicators.

Fixed, accompanied The active lane keeping assistance Carry out (3). by the display of a system is faulty. + message and an audible signal.

Rear foglamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Green warning/indicator lamps Automatic Fixed. Automatic front wiping is activated. wiping

Stop & Start Fixed. When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start puts the engine into STOP mode.

Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily unavailable or START mode is automatically triggered.

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

20 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Direction Direction indicators The direction indicators are on. indicators with audible signal.

Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Dipped beam Fixed. The lamps are on. headlamps

Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are on.

Automatic Fixed. The function has been activated via headlamp the touch screen (Vehicle/Driving + dipping menu). The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" position. or

Blue warning/indicator lamps Main beam Fixed. The lamps are on. headlamps

21 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Black/white warning/indicator lamps Foot on brake Fixed. Omission or insufficient pressure on With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running, the brake pedal. before releasing the parking brake, to move out of position P. With the EAT8 automatic gearbox, it may be necessary to press the brake pedal to unlock the gearbox from mode N. If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.

Foot on clutch Fixed. Stop & Start: the change to START Fully depress the clutch pedal. mode is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully depressed.

EAT8 automatic Fixed. The EAT8 automatic gearbox is The Unlock button must be pressed to unlock the gearbox locked. gearbox.

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

22 Instruments Indicators - an alert message indicates the distance Resetting the service remaining, as well as the period before the indicator Service indicator next service is due or how long it is overdue. 1 The service indicator must be reset after each The service indicator is displayed on the service. instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle If you have carried out the service on your The distance indicated (in miles or version: vehicle yourself: kilometres) is calculated according to the - the distance recorder display line indicates F switch off the ignition, distance covered and the time elapsed the distance remaining before the next since the last service. service is due, or the distance travelled The alert may also be triggered close to a since it was due preceded by the sign "-". due date.

Warning/indicator Actions/ State Cause lamp Observations

Service Lights up temporarily Between 620 and 1,860 miles F press and hold the trip distance recorder spanner when the ignition is (1,000 and 3,000 km) remain reset button, switched on. before the next service is due. F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown, Fixed, when the The service is due in Have your vehicle F when the display indicates "=0", release the ignition is switched on. less than 620 miles serviced very soon. button; the spanner disappears. (1,000 km).

Service Flashing then fixed, The servicing interval Have your vehicle If you have to disconnect the battery spanner when the ignition is has been exceeded. serviced as soon as following this operation, lock the vehicle flashing switched on. possible. and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to (With BlueHDi Diesel + be registered. engines, associated with the Service warning lamp).

23 Instruments

Retrieving the service information - in zone B, the temperature is too high; Oil level correct the maximum temperature and the (Only with .) display screen 2 central STOP warning lamps come on, You can access the service information at any accompanied by an audible signal and a time. warning message in the screen. You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. Oil level insufficient After first switching off the ignition, open the bonnet cautiously and check the coolant level. F Press the trip distance recorder reset button. For more information on Checking levels, The service information is displayed for a few refer to the corresponding section. seconds, then disappears. Engine coolant temperature gauge Engine oil level indicator This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL" or the display of the "Oil level incorrect" message, With an electric oil level indicator, the state accompanied by the Service warning lamp and of the engine oil level is displayed in the an audible signal. instrument panel for a few seconds when the If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using ignition is switched on, at the same time as the the dipstick, the level must be topped up to servicing information. avoid damage to the engine. For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section. The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes. With the engine running, when the needle is: - in zone A, the temperature is correct,

24 Instruments

Oil level indicator fault an estimate of the distance that can be covered, the With access via the boot range, before engine starting is prevented. Remaining range between 1,500 and 375 miles 1 (2,400 and 600 km)

In the event of the risk of non- When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp starting related to a lack of AdBlue® comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") indicating the The engine starting prevention system remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. This is signalled by the flashing of "OIL_ _" required by regulations is activated When driving, the message is displayed every or the display of the "Oil level measurement automatically once the AdBlue® tank is 185 miles (300 km) until the level is topped up. invalid" message. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer empty. The reserve level has been reached; it is or a qualified workshop. recommended that you top up as soon as possible. Range greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km) In the event of a fault with the electric When the ignition is switched on, no indicator, the oil level is no longer information on range is displayed automatically. monitored. If the system is faulty, you must check the Remaining range less than 375 miles (600 km) engine oil level using the manual dipstick located under the bonnet. For more information on Checking levels, When switching on the ignition, this warning refer to the corresponding section. lamp flashes, accompanied by the permanent lighting of the Service warning lamp, an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top up Pressing this button temporarily displays the AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") indicating ® AdBlue range indicators driving range*. the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. These range indicators are present only on BlueHDi When driving, this message is displayed every Diesel versions. 30 seconds until the AdBlue level has been Once the AdBlue® tank is on reserve or after detection topped up. of a fault with the SCR emissions control system, It is essential to top up as soon as possible and when the ignition is switched on, an indicator displays * Only with display screen 2. before the tank is completely empty; otherwise it will not be possible to restart the engine after the next stop. 25 Instruments

Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® in miles or kilometres. When driving, the audible signal and the The reserve level has been reached; it is message display are triggered every 6 miles recommended that you top up as soon as (10 km) until the AdBlue tank is topped up. possible. It is essential to top up as soon as possible and When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp These messages are accompanied by the before the tank is completely empty; otherwise flashes, along with the Service warning lamp, recommendation to not top up with more than it will not be possible to restart the engine after accompanied by an audible signal and the display of 10 litres of AdBlue. the next stop. the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible". Remaining range between 500 and 62 miles (800 and 100 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting prevention system required by legislation prevents starting of the engine. When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal (1 When switching on the ignition, this warning To be able to restart the engine, it is beep) and the display of a message (e.g. "Top up lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") indicating the signal and the display of the message ""Top up to its tank. remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. AdBlue: Starting impossible". When driving, the audible signal and the message The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting display are triggered every 62 miles (100 km) until the prevention system required by legislation For more information on ® AdBlue fluid is topped up. prevents starting of the engine. (BlueHDi engines), and, in particular, It is essential to top up as soon as possible and before on topping up, refer to the corresponding the tank is completely empty; otherwise it will not be To be able to restart the engine, it is section. possible to restart the engine after the next stop. essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its tank. With access via the fuel filler flap Remaining range between 1,500 and Remaining range less than 62 miles (100 km) 500 miles (2,400 and 800 km) For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi engines), and, in particular, on topping up, refer to the corresponding section. When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp When switching on the ignition, this warning comes on for about 30 seconds, accompanied by lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal an audible signal and the display of a message (1 beep) and the display of a message (e.g. (e.g. "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") miles") indicating the remaining range expressed indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. 26 Instruments

During the permitted driving phase In the event of a fault with the SCR You have exceeded the authorised driving emissions control system (between 0 and 685 miles (0 and 1,100 km)) limit: the starting prevention system 1 inhibits engine starting. A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 685 miles If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed To be able to start the engine, you must call on (1,100 km) after confirmation of a fault with (after 31 miles (50 km) covered with the a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. the SCR emissions control system. permanent display of the message signalling Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT a fault), these warning lamps come on and the dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as AdBlue warning lamp flashes, associated with Distance recorders possible. an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in 200 miles) indicating the remaining range In the event of the detection of a fault expressed in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR emissions control system persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the These warning lamps come on, accompanied ignition. by an audible signal and the display of the You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The total and trip distances are displayed for message "Emissions fault". workshop as soon as possible. thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, The alert is triggered when driving when the Otherwise you will not be able to restart the vehicle. when the driver's door is opened and when the fault is detected for the first time, then when vehicle is locked or unlocked. switching on the ignition for subsequent Starting prevented journeys, while the fault persists. When travelling abroad, you may need to change the unit of distance: the speed Each time the ignition is switched on, these If it is a temporary fault, the alert display must be expressed in the official warning lamps come on and the AdBlue disappears during the next journey, after units of the country (km or miles). The warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an self-diagnosis of the SCR system. change of units is done via the screen audible signal and the display of the message configuration menu, with the vehicle "Emissions fault: Starting prevented". stationary.

27 Instruments Total distance recorder Instrument panel Trip computer It measures the total distance travelled by the Information displayed about the current journey vehicle since its first registration. (range, current fuel consumption, average fuel consumption, etc.). Trip distance recorder Data displays With display screen 1 and the audio system: It measures the distance travelled since it was reset by the driver. With the exterior lighting on, press this button to adjust the brightness of the dashboard lighting, the touch screen and the ambient lighting. Release the button when the desired level is reached. With display screen 2: Touch screen

F With the ignition on, press the button until zeroes appear.

Lighting dimmer For the manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and the touch screen.

Operates only when the vehicle's exterior F Press on the Vehicle/Driving menu. lighting is on. F In this menu, select the Vehicle settings tab, then Comfort lighting. F Adjust the brightness (only for the touch screen) by pressing on the "+" or "-" buttons.

28 Instruments

F Press this button, located on the end of the For example, trip 1 can be used for daily figures The current information tab with: wiper control stalk, to display the different and trip 2 for monthly figures. - the range, tabs in turn. - the current fuel consumption, 1 - The current information tab with: - the Stop & Start time counter. With display screen 1 and the touch screen: • the range, Information is accessible from the "Vehicle/ • the current fuel consumption, Driving" menu. • the Stop & Start time counter. The trip 1 tab with: - Trip 1 with: - the distance travelled, • the average speed, - the average fuel consumption, • the average fuel consumption, - the average speed for the first • the distance travelled, trip. for the first trip. The trip 2 tab with: - Trip 2 with: - the distance travelled, • the average speed, - the average fuel consumption, • the average fuel consumption, - the average speed for the • the distance travelled, second trip. for the second trip. Permanent display: F Select the "Vehicle/Driving" menu. Reset trip Reset trip F In this menu, select the "Driving functions" tab. The information of the trip computer is displayed in the primary page of the menu. F Press one of the buttons to display the desired tab. Temporary display in a specific window: F Press the end of the wiper control stalk for F When the required trip is displayed, press access to the information and to display the the button on the end of the wiper control different tabs. stalk for more than two seconds. F When the desired trip is displayed, press Trips 1 and 2 are independent but their use is the reset button or the end of the wiper identical. control stalk.

29 Instruments

Trips 1 and 2 are independent but their use is Current fuel consumption identical. Monochrome screen C (mpg or km/l or l/100 km) For example, trip 1 can be used for daily figures Calculated during the last few Displays in the screen and trip 2 for monthly figures. seconds. This displays the following information: - the time, - the date, This function is only displayed from Trip computer, some - the exterior temperature (this flashes if 19 mph (30 km/h). definitions there is a risk of ice), Range Average fuel consumption - parking sensor information, - the audio source being listened to, (mpg or km/l or l/100 km) (miles or km) - telephone or hands-free kit information, Calculated since the last time the The distance which can still be - the trip computer, trip recorder was reset to zero. travelled with the fuel remaining in - alert messages, the tank (related to the average fuel - settings menus for the screen and the consumption over the last few miles Average speed vehicle equipment. (kilometres) travelled). (mph or km/h) Calculated since the last time the Controls This value may fluctuate if a change trip recorder was reset to zero. of driving style or terrain results in a significant change in the current fuel Distance travelled consumption. (miles or km) Dashes are displayed when the range falls Calculated since the last time the below 19 miles (30 km). After filling with at least trip recorder was reset to zero. 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 miles (100 km). Stop & Start time counter From the control panel of your audio system, If dashes are displayed continuously while (minutes/seconds or hours/ you can press: driving in place of the digits, contact a minutes) F button A to chooses between the display PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A time counter calculates the time of audio information in full screen or the spent in STOP mode during a shared display of audio and trip computer journey. information, It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on. 30 Instruments

F the "MENU" button to access the main For more information on the "Multimedia" player) to be connected or disconnected and menu, menu, refer to the Audio equipment and the connection mode to be defined (hands-free, F the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll through the telematics section. playing audio files). 1 items in the screen, For more information on the "Bluetooth F the "7" or "8" buttons to change a setting "Telephone" menu connection" menu, refer to the Audio value, equipment and telematics section. F the "OK" button to confirm, or "Personalisation- F the "Back" button to abandon the operation With the audio system switched on, this menu configuration" menu in progress. allows you to make a call or view the various telephone directories. Main menu For more information on the "Telephone" menu, F Press the "MENU" button for access to the refer to the Audio equipment and telematics This menu gives access to the following main menu: section. functions: - "Multimedia", - "Define the vehicle parameters", - "Telephone", "Trip computer" menu - "Display configuration". - "Trip computer", - "Bluetooth connection", Define the vehicle parameters - "Personalisation-configuration". F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the This menu allows you to activate or deactivate This menu allows you to consult information menu required, then confirm by pressing the the following equipment, classified in different concerning the status of the vehicle. "OK" button. categories: Diagnosis - "Access to the vehicle": • "Plip action" (Selective unlocking of the "Multimedia" menu Summarises the alert messages of various driver's door). functions. - "Driving assistance": • "Tyre inflation" (Under-inflation detection "Bluetooth connection" system), With the audio system switched on, this menu • "Rear wipe in reverse gear" (Rear wiper menu allows you to activate or deactivate the linked to reverse gear), functions associated with use of the radio • "Parking assistance". (RDS, DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display) or to choose the media play With the audio system switched on, this menu mode (Normal, Random, Random all, Repeat). allows a Bluetooth device (telephone, media 31 Instruments

and, depending on equipment, allows: Display configuration After a few moments with no action on the - access to the navigation system controls second page, the first page is displayed This menu gives access to the following and the display of associated information. settings: automatically. - "Choice of units", - "Date and time adjustment", To deactivate or activate a function, select - "Personalise display", For safety reasons, the vehicle must "OFF" or "ON". - "Language". always be stationary for the driver to perform operations that require close Use this button to adjust the settings attention. for a function. For safety reasons, configuration of Some functions are not accessible when the multifunction screen by the driver driving. must only be done when the vehicle is Use this button for access to stationary. additional information on the function. General operation Use this button to confirm. Touch screen Recommendations This screen is of the capacitive type. This system gives access to: Use is possible in all temperatures. - the permanent display of the time and Do not use pointed objects on the touch Use this button to return to the the exterior temperature (a blue symbol screen. previous page. appears when there is a risk of ice), Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. - the heating/air conditioning controls, Use a soft clean cloth to clean the touch - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle screen. functions and systems, Menus - audio system and telephone controls and the display of associated information, Design - the display of visual parking aids (visual Use the buttons below the touch screen to parking sensor information, Park Assist, access the menus, then press the virtual etc.), buttons in the touch screen. - Internet services and the display of Some menus may display across two pages: associated information. press the "OPTIONS" button to access the second page.

32 Instruments

Radio Media. Volume adjustment/mute. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. 1 Air conditioning. Allows control of the settings for temperature, air flow, etc. Upper bar Certain information is always displayed in the Connected Navigation or Mirror Screen*. upper bar of the touch screen: See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. - Time and exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp appears when there is a risk Vehicle or Driving*. of ice). Allows the activation, deactivation and - Summary of the air conditioning information, adjustment of settings for certain functions. and direct access to the corresponding menu. The functions accessible from this menu are - Summary of information from the Radio arranged under two tabs: "Vehicle settings" Media, Telephone menus and navigation and "Driving functions". instructions*. Telephone. - Notifications. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. - Access to the Settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel (date/time, Applications. languages, units, etc.). Allows the display of available connected services and access to the Eco-coaching function.

You can also press with three fingers on the touch screen to show all of the menu buttons.

* Depending on equipment * Depending on equipment 33 Instruments Vehicle/Driving menu PEUGEOT Connect Radio "Vehicle settings" tab Families Functions

- "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of automatic guide- me-home lighting. - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior welcome lighting. "Headlamps"

- "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper on with reverse gear. - "Ambient lighting": activation/deactivation of ambient lighting and "Comfort" adjustment of brightness.

- "Unlock: driver's door only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the driver’s door. - "Unlock: boot only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the "Vehicle access" tailgate.

- "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the distance alert and automatic emergency braking. - "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of speed limit "Security" sign recognition. - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue detection system.

34 Instruments

PEUGEOT Connect Nav For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding 1 Families Functions section.

- "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper on with reverse gear. - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of automatic guide- "Comfort lighting" me-home lighting. - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior welcome lighting. - "Ambient lighting": activation/deactivation of ambient lighting and adjustment of brightness.

- "Unlock: driver's door only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the driver’s door. - "Unlock: boot only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the "Vehicle access" tailgate.

- "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the distance alert and automatic emergency braking. - "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of speed limit "Security" sign recognition. - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue detection system.

35 Instruments

"Driving functions" tab Settings

Functions Comments PEUGEOT Connect Nav The functions available through the " " Activation/deactivation of the function. Park Assist upper menu bar are detailed in the table below. "Automatic headlamp dip" Activation/deactivation of the function.

"Stop & Start" Activation/deactivation of the function. Buttons Comments

"Blind spot sensors" Activation/deactivation of the function. Select a theme.

"Traction control" Activation/deactivation of the function. Audio settings (sound ambience, "Parking sensors" Activation/deactivation of the function. sound distribution, sound level, voice volume, ringtone volume). "Under-inflation​ initialisation" Reinitialisation of the under-inflation detection system.

Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter or "Adjusting Speeds" programmable cruise control. Switch off the screen.

"Diagnostic" Summary of current alerts.

"Active Lane Keeping Assistance" Activation/deactivation of the function. Settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel.

For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding section.

36 Instruments

PEUGEOT Connect Radio Buttons Comments Buttons Comments The functions available through the 1 Choice of units: Adjustment of the display upper menu bar are detailed in the - temperature (°Celsius or parameters (text scrolling, table below. °Fahrenheit), animations, etc.) and brightness. - distances and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg Buttons Comments or km/l). Choice of units: Turn off the screen (black Choice of display language used - temperature (°Celsius or screen). for the touch screen and the °Fahrenheit), To return to the current screen, digital instrument panel. - distances and fuel press the black screen or one of consumption (l/100 km, mpg the menu buttons. or km/l). Setting the date and time. Option of synchronisation with Adjustment of the brightness of Choice of display language used GPS. the instrument panel ambient lighting. for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel. Adjustment of the display Choice and settings for three parameters (text scrolling, user profiles. Setting the date and time. animations, etc.) and brightness.

Settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel. Choice and settings for three user profiles. Activation and configuration of the settings for the Wi-Fi.

37 Instruments With PEUGEOT Connect F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab. Setting the time and date F Set the date and/or time using the numeric Radio keypad. With screen C F Select the "Settings" menu. F Select "Date and time". Additional settings

You can choose: - To change the display format of the date F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab. and time (12h/24h). F Choose the display formats. - To change the time zone. F Change the date and/or time using the - To activate or deactivate synchronisation numeric keypad. with the GPS (UTC). F Press the MENU button for access to the F Confirm with "OK". main menu. The system does not automatically The system does not automatically manage the change between winter and manage the change between winter and summer time (depending on country). summer time (depending on country). The change between winter and summer F Press the "7" or "8" buttons to select the time is done by changing the time zone. Personalisation-configuration menu, then confirm by pressing the OK button. With PEUGEOT Connect F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the Nav Display configuration menu, then confirm Setting of the time and date is only available if by pressing the OK button. synchronisation with the GPS is deactivated.

F Press the "5" or "6" and "7" or "8" button to adjust the date and time values, and then F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the confirm by pressing the OKbutton. secondary page.

F Select "Setting the time-date".

38 Access

battery, etc. For more information on the Back- With Keyless Entry and Starting Remote control and key up procedures, refer to the corresponding Remote control function section. Integral key The key built into the remote control can be 2 used for the following operations (depending on version): - unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle. - activation/deactivation of the mechanical child lock. - activation/deactivation of the front passenger airbag. F To eject the key or put it back in place, pull - back-up door locking. and hold the button. The remote control can be used for the - switching on the ignition and starting/ following functions, depending on version: switching off the engine. - unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle, Unlocking/locking is confirmed by rapid - remote switching on of the lighting, flashing of the direction indicators for Without Keyless Entry and Starting - activation/deactivation of the alarm, approximately two seconds. - locating the vehicle, At the same time, depending on your - vehicle immobiliser. version, the door mirrors unfold/fold. If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is The remote control includes a simple key that deactivated when the vehicle is unlocked. allows the central locking or unlocking of the vehicle using the door lock and starting and switching off the engine. Under normal operating conditions, it is preferable to use the remote control. F To unfold or fold the key, press the button. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be locked or unlocked in the event of a failure of the remote control, the central locking, the

39 Access Unlocking the vehicle F To unlock the other doors and the boot, Locating your vehicle press this button again. With the remote control This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your F Press one of these buttons to Selective unlocking of the vehicle must be locked. unlock the vehicle. boot F Press this button. Complete unlocking is activated by default. This setting is done in the Vehicle/Driving menu, then Driving functions and Vehicle This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the access. direction indicators will flash for around ten With the key F Press this button to unlock the seconds. F Turn the key in the driver's door lock boot. towards the front of the vehicle to unlock. Remote operation of lighting If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not Use this button for access to A short press on this button switches deactivated. The opening of a door will trigger additional information. on the lighting remotely (sidelamps, the alarm which will be stopped when the dipped beam headlamps and number ignition is switched on. Locking the vehicle plate lamps). A second press before this time comes to an With the remote control Selective unlocking of the end cancels the remote operation of lighting. vehicle F Press this button to lock the vehicle completely. Complete unlocking is activated by default. This setting is done in the Vehicle/Driving Deadlocking menu, then Driving functions and Vehicle Maintaining the locking action (key or remote control) closes the windows automatically. access. Deadlocking renders the exterior and Use this button for access to With the key interior door controls inoperative. additional information. It also deactivates the manual central F Turn the key towards the rear of the control button. With the remote control vehicle to lock the vehicle completely. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the If your vehicle has an alarm, this will not be vehicle when it is deadlocked. F To unlock the driver's door only, activated. press this button once.

40 Access With the remote control ​Keyless Entry and Complete unlocking F Press this button to lock the Starting vehicle fully.

F Within five seconds, press this button again 2 to deadlock the vehicle.

Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for F With the electronic key on your person approximately two seconds. and in recognition zone A, pass your hand Depending on your version, the door behind the door handle of a front door to mirrors fold at the same time. unlock the vehicle, then pull the handle to This system allows the unlocking, locking open the door. and starting of the vehicle, while carrying With the key the electronic key in the recognition zone "A" Selective unlocking around the vehicle. F Turn the key to the rear in the driver's door When selective unlocking of the drivers door is lock to lock the vehicle completely. Unlocking/locking is confirmed by rapid activated: F Turn the key to the rear again within five flashing of the direction indicators for F Electronic key in the driver side zone, pass seconds to deadlock the vehicle. approximately two seconds. your hand behind the driver’s door handle At the same time, depending on your to just unlock the driver’s door, pull on the version, the door mirrors unfold/fold. handle to open the door. If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is F Electronic key in the passenger side zone, deactivated when the vehicle is unlocked. pass your hand behind the front passenger door handle to unlock the whole vehicle, pull on the handle to open the door.

41 Access

When unlocking of the boot only is activated: Maintain pressure with your finger or thumb F Within five seconds, press the door handle F With the electronic key in the recognition until the windows close completely. again to deadlock the vehicle or the locking zone A, press the boot opening control control located on the tailgate (on the right). to unlock just the tailgate, then raise the tailgate. Ensure that no person could prevent the Complete unlocking is activated by default. correct closing of the windows. This setting is done in the Vehicle/Driving Be aware of children when operating the Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, menu, then Driving functions and Vehicle windows. etc.) on the inner surface of the door access. handle may affect detection. If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore Deadlocking detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a Use this button for access to qualified workshop. additional information. Deadlocking renders the exterior and A sudden splash of water (stream of water, interior door controls inoperative. high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be Locking It also deactivates the manual central identified by the system as the desire to locking button. open the vehicle. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked. For safety and theft protection reasons, do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle, even when you are close to it. Via the doors or the tailgate: It is recommended that you keep it with F With the electronic key on your person in you. recognition zone A, press with a finger on the door handle (at the markings) to lock the vehicle or on the locking control located on the tailgate (on the right).

F With the key in recognition zone A, press with one finger on one of the front door handles (at the markings) to lock the vehicle or press the tailgate locking control.

42 Access

If one of the doors or the boot is still open In order to preserve the battery in the After unlocking, if no door is opened or if the electronic key for the ​Keyless electronic key and the vehicle's battery, within 30 seconds, the doors lock again Entry and Starting system has been left the "hands-free" functions are put into automatically. inside the vehicle, the central locking does long-term standby after 21 days without not take place. use. To restore these functions, press If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and one of the remote control buttons or start 2 if no action is taken at the doors or boot, the engine with the electronic key in the the vehicle will automatically lock itself reader. again after about 30 seconds. For more information on Starting - If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not switching off the engine with "Keyless reactivated. Entry and Starting", refer to the The automatic folding and unfolding of corresponding section. the door mirrors can be deactivated by a F PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Press the button. This locks and unlocks the doors and the boot. Locking/unlocking from the inside As a safety measure (children on board), If the vehicle is deadlocked or locked with never leave the vehicle without taking the the remote control or the door handles, electronic key for the ​Keyless Entry and the button is not operational. In this case, Automatic central locking use the key or remote control to unlock. Starting system with you, even for a short of the doors period. Be aware of the risk of theft when the The doors can lock automatically while driving electronic key for the K​ eyless Entry and (speed above 6 mph [10 km/h]). When carrying large objects with the boot Starting system is in one of the defined open, you can press this button to lock zones with the vehicle unlocked. To activate or deactivate this just the doors. function, press and hold the button When locking from inside, the door mirrors until a message appears in the do not fold. screen.

43 Access

Advice Locking the vehicle Back-up procedures Driving with the doors locked may render Remote control access by the emergency services to the Lost keys, remote control, The high frequency remote control is a interior more difficult in an emergency. electronic key sensitive system; do not operate it while As a safety precaution (with children on Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's it is in your pocket as there is a possibility board), remove the key from the ignition or registration certificate, your personal that it may unlock the vehicle, without you take the electronic key when you leave the identification documents and if possible, the being aware of it. vehicle, even for a short time. label bearing the key code. Do not press the buttons of your remote The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve control out of range and out of sight of Lost keys, remote control, electronic the key code and the transponder code your vehicle. The remote control may stop required to order a new key working and would have to be reinitialised. key The remote control does not operate when Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the Total unlocking/locking of the key is in the ignition, even when the vehicle's registration document, your ignition is switched off. personal identification documents and if the vehicle with the key possible, the label bearing the key code. Use these procedures in the following cases: The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to Electrical interference - remote control cell battery flat, retrieve the key code and the transponder The K​ eyless Entry and Starting electronic - remote control fault, code required to order a new key. key may not operate if close to certain - vehicle in an area subject to strong electronic devices: telephone, laptop electromagnetic interference. computer, strong magnetic fields, etc. In the first case, you can also replace the Purchasing a second-hand vehicle remote control cell battery. Anti-theft protection Have the key codes memorised by a In the second case, you can also reinitialise the Do not make any modifications to the PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys remote control. electronic engine immobiliser system; this in your possession are the only ones Refer to the corresponding sections. could cause malfunctions. which can start the vehicle. F Insert the key in the door lock. Do not forget to turn the steering wheel to F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle engage the steering lock. to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.

44 Access

F Turn the key towards the rear again within Passenger doors Without Keyless Entry and Starting 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts.

Central locking not functioning 2 Use these procedures in the following cases: - central locking fault, - battery disconnected or discharged.

F On the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on. In the event of a malfunction with the F Insert the integral key in the latch located central locking system, the battery must on the edge of the door and turn it an eighth be disconnected to lock the boot and thus With Keyless Entry and Starting of a turn to the right for the right-hand side, ensure that the vehicle is locked fully. Battery ref.: CR2032/3 volts. and to the left for the left-hand side. F Close the doors and check from the outside that the vehicle is locked. Driver's door F Insert the key in the door lock. F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle Changing the battery to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it. If the battery is flat, you are informed by lighting of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, an audible signal If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not and a message in the screen. activated/deactivated when the vehicle is locked/unlocked. F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver Opening a door will trigger the alarm, at the cut-out. which can be stopped by switching the F Remove the cover. ignition on. F Remove the discharged battery from its housing. F Fit the new battery into its housing observing the polarity. F Clip the cover onto the casing. 45 Access

The remote control is now fully operational The electronic key is now fully operational again. Do not throw remote control batteries again. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT away as they contain metals which are dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as harmful to the environment. Take them With Keyless Entry and Starting possible. to an approved collection point.

Reinitialising the remote Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, Doors control replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, Opening Following replacement of the battery or in you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your the event of a remote control fault, it may be vehicle. From outside necessary to reinitialise the remote control. F After unlocking the If the problem persists, contact a vehicle using the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop remote control or as soon as possible. the key, pull the door handle. Without Keyless Entry and Starting From inside F Pull the interior control lever of a door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.

F Place the mechanical key (integral with the F Switch off the ignition. remote control) in the lock to unlock your F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition). vehicle. The interior opening control on a rear door F Immediately press the closed F Remove the carpet underneath the 12 V socket. does not work if the child lock is on. padlock button for a few seconds. F Place the electronic key in the housing provided For more information on the Child Lock, for this purpose. refer to the corresponding section. F Switch on the ignition by pressing "START/ F Switch off the ignition and remove the key STOP". from the switch. 46 Access Closing Closing F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot. If a door or the boot is not closed F Lower the tailgate using one of the interior F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the correctly with the engine running or the grab handles. lock to unlock the boot. vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph If the tailgate is not closed correctly (the lock F Move the latch to the right. (10 km/h)), a message appears for a has two positions): with the engine running or 2 few seconds. when moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), Locking after closing a message appears for a few seconds. Boot If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked. Opening In the event of a fault or difficulties felt in manoeuvring the tailgate when opening Bicycle/accessory carrier or closing it, have it quickly checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to stop this issue getting worse and so as to not cause the tailgate to drop, and serious injuries. F With the vehicle unlocked or with the electronic key of the ​Keyless Entry and Starting system in the recognition zone, Back-up release press the central tailgate control. F Lift the tailgate. System allowing the mechanical unlocking For more information on the Remote control of the boot in the event of a battery or central or ​Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the locking system malfunction. corresponding section. Do not fit an accessory carrier to the In the event of a fault or difficulties Unlocking tailgate. encountered in manoeuvring the tailgate when opening or closing it, have it quickly checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to stop this issue getting worse and so as to not cause the tailgate to drop, and serious injuries.

47 Access

The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted, interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds. Alarm moved or knocked. If an access (door, boot, bonnet, etc.) is not properly closed, the vehicle is not locked but Self-protection function monitoring will be activated after 45 seconds. The system checks for the putting out of service of its components. The alarm is triggered if the siren's battery, button or wiring is disconnected or Deactivation damaged. F Press this unlocking button on the For all work on the alarm system, contact This system protects and provides a deterrent remote control. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified against theft and break-ins. workshop. It provides the following types of monitoring: or Exterior perimeter Locking the vehicle with full F Unlock the vehicle using the "​Keyless Entry The system checks for opening of the vehicle. alarm system and Starting" system. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a The monitoring system is deactivated: the door, the boot or the bonnet. Activation indicator lamp in the button goes off and the Interior volumetric F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. The system checks for any variation in the F Lock the vehicle using the remote volume of the passenger compartment. control. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a Where the vehicle locks itself again automatically (occurs 30 seconds after window, enters the passenger compartment or or moves inside the vehicle. unlocking, if a door or the boot is not F Lock the vehicle using the "​Keyless Entry opened), the monitoring system is not For vehicles that are fitted with it, interior and Starting" system. reactivated automatically. volumetric monitoring is incompatible with The monitoring system is active: the indicator To reactivate it, the vehicle must be programmed thermal preconditioning. lamp in this button flashes once per second unlocked and locked again, using the and the direction indicators come on for about remote control key or the "​Keyless Entry 2 seconds. and Starting" system. Anti-tilt monitoring After an instruction to lock the vehicle using the remote control or the "​Keyless Entry (On GT and GTi versions) and Starting" system, the exterior perimeter The system checks for any change in the monitoring is activated after 5 seconds, the attitude of the vehicle. 48 Access Locking the vehicle The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is When the vehicle is unlocked using activated: the indicator lamp in the button the remote control or the "​Keyless with exterior perimeter flashes once per second. Entry and Starting" system, rapid monitoring only To take effect, this deactivation must be carried flashing of the indicator lamp in the Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring out each time the ignition is switched off. button informs you that the alarm was (and anti-tilt monitoring if your vehicle has it) triggered during your absence. 2 to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in When the ignition is switched on, this certain cases such as: Reactivating the interior flashing stops immediately. - passengers on board the vehicle, volumetric monitoring - leaving a window partially open, The anti-tilt alarm is also reactivated, if your Failure of the remote control - washing your vehicle, vehicle has one. To deactivate the monitoring functions: - changing a wheel*, F unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to - having your vehicle towed*, F Deactivate the exterior perimeter the remote control) in the driver's door lock, - transport on a ship or ferry*. monitoring by unlocking the F open the door; the alarm is triggered, vehicle using the remote control F switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The or the "​ Keyless Entry and * Only cases that apply to GT/GTi vehicles indicator lamp in the button goes off. Starting" system. equipped with the anti-tilt alarm only. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. Deactivating the interior F Locking the vehicle without volumetric and anti-tilt Reactivate the full alarm system by locking monitoring the vehicle using the remote control or the ​" activating the alarm Keyless Entry and Starting" system. F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key F Switch off the ignition and within The indicator lamp in the button flashes once (integral to the remote control) in the driver's ten seconds, press this button per second again. until the indicator lamp is lit door lock. continuously. Triggering of the alarm Malfunction F Get out of the vehicle. When the ignition is switched on, This results in sounding the siren and flashing fixed illumination of the indicator F Immediately lock the vehicle using the direction indicators for thirty seconds. lamp in the button indicates a fault the remote control or the "​Keyless The monitoring functions remain active until with the system. Entry and Starting" system. the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

49 Access

The electric window switches remain With the warning lamp off, the switches are Electric windows operational for approximately one minute after active. the key has been removed. Once this time has elapsed, the electric Reinitialising the electric windows will not operate. To reactivate them, windows switch the ignition on again. Following reconnection of the battery, the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. Safety anti-pinch The anti-pinch safety function is not active during these operations: 1. Left-hand front. (depending on version) - bring the window down completely, then 2. Right-hand front. When the window rises and meets an obstacle, bring it back up. It will go up by a few 3. Right-hand rear. it stops and immediately partially lowers again. centimetres with each press. Perform the 4. Left-hand rear. operation again until the window is fully In the event of unwanted opening of the window Deactivating the rear electric window closed, 5. when closing automatically, press the switch switches. - continue to pull the switch upwards for at until the window opens completely, then pull least one second after reaching the window the switch immediately until the window closes. Maintaining the locking action (on the key closed position. Continue to hold the switch for approximately or the remote control) closes the windows one second after the window has closed. automatically. Always remove the key when leaving the The safety anti-pinch function is not active vehicle, even for a short time. Manual operation during this operation. In the event of contact (pinching) during To open or close the window, press or pull the operation of the windows, you must switch gently, without exceeding the resistance reverse the movement of the window. To point. The window stops as soon as the switch Deactivating the rear do this, press the switch concerned. is released. When operating the passenger electric electric window switches window switches, the driver must ensure that no-one is preventing the windows Automatic operation For the safety of your children, press from closing correctly. To open or close the window, press or pull the this switch to prevent operation The driver must ensure that the switch fully, beyond the resistance point: the of the windows of the rear doors, passengers use the electric windows window opens or closes completely when the irrespective of their position. correctly. Be aware of children when operating the switch is released. Pressing the switch again If the indicator lamp is on, the rear controls are windows. stops the movement of the window. deactivated.

50 Ease of use and comfort PEUGEOT i-Cockpit Front head restraints Refitting a head restraint F Introduce the head restraint rods into the Height adjustment guides in the seat backrest. F Push the head restraint down as far as it will go. F Press the lug A to free the head restraint and push it down. F Adjust the height of the head restraint. 3 Never drive with the head restraints Upwards: removed; they should be in place and F pull the head restraint up to the desired correctly adjusted for the occupant of the Before going out on the road and to benefit position; the head restraint can be felt to seat. from the ergonomic layout of the PEUGEOT click into position. i-Cockpit, adjust in the following order: Downwards: - the height of the head restraint, F press the lug A and push the head restraint - the seat backrest angle, down to the desired position. Front seats with manual - the seat cushion height, adjustments - the longitudinal position of the seat, The adjustment is correct when the upper - the depth and then the height of the steering edge of the head restraint is level with the For safety reasons, seat adjustments wheel, top of the head. must only be made when the vehicle is - the rear view mirror and door mirrors. stationary. Once these adjustments have been made, Removing a head restraint ensure that from your driving position you can Longitudinal see the "head-up" instrument panel clearly, F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go. over the reduced diameter steering wheel. F Press the lug A to release the head restraint and remove it completely. F Stow the head restraint securely.

F Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards. 51 Ease of use and comfort

Before moving the seat backwards, Seat backrest angle Longitudinal ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat.

F Turn the knob to adjust the backrest. F Push the control forwards or backwards to slide the seat. Height Lumbar Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat. F Turn the knob manually to obtain the F Pull the control upwards to raise or push desired level of lumbar support. it downwards to lower, as many times as necessary to obtain the position required. Seat backrest angle Electrically adjusted driver’s seat

For safety reasons, seat adjustments must only be made when the vehicle is stationary. F Tilt the control forwards or backwards to adjust the angle of the seat backrest. To avoid discharging the battery, carry out these adjustments with the engine running.

52 Ease of use and comfort Cushion height and angle Two positions can be stored and recalled, using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat. Additional adjustments

Storing a position using buttons Heated seats M/1/2 F Switch on the ignition. F Adjust your seat. F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds. 3 F Tilt the rear of the control upwards or An audible signal indicates that the position has downwards to obtain the required height. been stored. F Tilt the front of the control upwards or Storing a new position cancels the previous downwards to obtain the required angle. position. With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately. Recalling a stored position F Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and select the level of heating required: F With the ignition on or the engine running, Storing driving positions press button 1 or 2 to return to the 0: Off. corresponding position. 1: Low. An audible signal confirms that the adjustment 2: Medium. is complete. 3: High. You can interrupt the current movement by pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the seat controls. Do not use the function when the seat is A stored position cannot be recalled while not occupied. driving. Reduce the intensity of the heating as Recalling stored positions is deactivated soon as possible. 45 seconds after switching off the ignition. When the seat and passenger compartment have reached an adequate temperature, you can stop the function; reducing the consumption of electrical System which registers the electrical settings current reduces fuel consumption. of the driver's seat.

53 Ease of use and comfort

During this time, massage is performed in 6 Prolonged use at the highest setting is Electric lumbar adjustment cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage not recommended for those with sensitive followed by 4 minutes of break). skin. After one hour, the function is deactivated, the There is a risk of burns for people whose indicator lamp goes off. perception of heat is impaired (illness, Deactivate the massage function by pressing taking medication, etc.). this button, its indicator lamp goes off. There is a risk of overheating the system if material with insulating properties is used, This function provides lumbar massage to the such as cushions or seat covers. persons in front; it only operates when the Do not use the system: engine is running as well as in STOP mode of - if wearing damp clothing, the Stop & Start system. - if child seats are fitted. To avoid breaking the heating element in F Press the control to obtain the desired Adjustment of intensity the seat: lumbar support. - do not place heavy objects on the seat, - do not kneel or stand on the seat, Massage function - do not place sharp objects on the seat, - do not spill liquids onto the seat. Activation/Deactivation To avoid the risk of short-circuit: - do not use liquid products for cleaning the seat, - never use the heating function when the seat is damp.

F Press this button to adjust the intensity of the massage. Two levels of massage are available.

F Press this button. Its indicator lamp comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 1 hour.

54 Ease of use and comfort

Steering wheel adjustment Demisting – Defrosting As a safety measure, the mirrors should Demisting - defrosting of the door be adjusted to reduce the blind spots. mirrors operates with the engine The objects observed are, in reality, closer running, by switching on the heated than they appear. rear screen. Take this into account when assessing the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

For more information on Rear screen demist – defrost, refer to the 3 corresponding section. Folding F From outside: lock the vehicle using the electronic key or the "​Keyless Entry and F When stationary, lower the control lever to release Starting" system. the steering wheel adjustment mechanism. Adjustment F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving control A in the central position rearwards. position. F Pull the control lever to lock the steering wheel adjustment mechanism. If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is As a safety precaution, these operations unlocked. Pull again on control A. should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary. Unfolding F Move control A to the right or to the left to F Mirrors select the corresponding mirror. From outside: unlock the vehicle using the electronic key or the "​Keyless Entry and Door mirrors F Move control B in any of the four directions to adjust. Starting" system. F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass F Return control A to its central position. control A in the central position rearwards. permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded for parking in narrow spaces.

55 Ease of use and comfort

F Position the corresponding outer seat belt The folding and unfolding of the door Automatic "electrochrome" against the backrest and buckle it. mirrors using the remote control can be model F Place the head restraints in the low position. deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a This system automatically and progressively qualified workshop. changes between day and night use by means of a sensor measuring the light coming from the If necessary, the mirrors can be folded rear of the vehicle. manually. In order to ensure optimum visibility during Rear view mirror your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which engaged. darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, the headlamps of other vehicles, etc. Rear seats (hatchback) Manual model Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and folding backrest (1/3 – 2/3), which can be F Press control 1 to release seat backrest 2. Adjustment folded to adapt the loading space in the boot. F Fold seat backrest 2 onto cushion 3. F Adjust the mirror so that the mirror is directed correctly in the "day" position. Folding the backrest Day/night position When folding the seat, the centre seat belt should not be buckled but laid out flat on the seat.

The rear seat cushion does not fold:, to increase the load volume in the boot, only the backrest folds.

F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- dazzle position. F Push the lever to change to the normal F Move the corresponding front seat forwards "day" position. if necessary. 56 Ease of use and comfort Repositioning the backrest Folding the seat from the rear

3

F Check that nothing is preventing the backrest from folding (seatbelts, etc.) and F Straighten backrest 2 and secure it. that no object can interfere with the seat’s F Check that the red indicator, located next to manoeuvre. F Check that nothing is preventing the control 1, is no longer visible. F Place the head restraints in the low position. backrest from folding and that no object can F Unbuckle and reposition the outer seat belt interfere with the seat’s manoeuvre. on the side of the backrest. F Move the corresponding front seat forwards if necessary. When repositioning the seat backrest, F Check the correct position of the seatbelt on take care not to trap the seat belts. the side of the seat backrest. F Place the head restraints in the low position.

Rear seats (SW) Folding bench seat (1/3 – 2/3), which can be folded to adapt the loading space in the boot. F Pull the control from the boot, the backrest Folding the seat from the folds onto the seat cushion. boot Each part of the bench seat (1/3 or 2/3) has its own control for unlocking the backrest from the boot. 57 Ease of use and comfort

When repositioning the rear seat, be sure Interior fittings to not trap the seatbelts and to position their buckles correctly.

Outer rear seat head restraints These have a position for use (up) and a stowed position (down). They can be removed and are interchangeable. F Pull the control 1 forwards, the backrest folds onto the seat. Repositioning the seat

To remove a head restraint: F pull the head restraint fully upwards, F then, press the lug A.

F Straighten the backrest and secure it. The central head restraint cannot be F Check that the red indicator, located next to adjusted. control 1, is no longer visible. F Raise or put the head restraints back in Never drive with the head restraints 1. Refrigerated glove box fitted with an air place. removed; they must be fitted and correctly vent. adjusted. 58 Ease of use and comfort 2. 12 V accessory socket (120 W) Fitting Front armrest Observe the maximum power rating to avoid damaging your accessory. When fitting the mat for the first time, on the The height and longitudinal position of the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the 3. USB port armrest cover can be adjusted for greater wallet provided. 4. Cup holder/can holder (depending on comfort. The other mats are simply placed on the version) carpet. Height adjustment 5. Storage (depending on version) 6. Storage – Removable cup holder/can holder Removing Turn the carrier over for access to the cup To remove the mat on the driver's side: holder/can holder. F 3 move the seat as far back as possible, 7. Front armrest F unclip the fixings, 8. 220 V socket (120 W) or USB port F remove the mat. (depending on version) Refitting F Raise the cover to the required position Observe the maximum power rating to avoid To refit the mat on the driver's side: (low, intermediate or high). damaging your accessory. F F position the mat correctly, If you raise the cover slightly beyond the Mats F reattach the fixings by pressing, high position, guide it when lowering it to the F check that the mat is secured correctly. low position.

To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: Longitudinal adjustment - Only use mats which are suited to the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used. - Never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the F Slide the cover fully forwards or rearwards. cruise control/speed limiter. The mats approved by PEUGEOT have two fixings located below the seat.

59 Ease of use and comfort

Storage The connection of an electrical device When the USB port is used, the portable not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a device charges automatically. USB charger, may adversely affect the While charging, a message is displayed operation of vehicle electrical systems, if the power consumption of the portable causing faults such as poor radio device exceeds the amperage supplied by reception or interference with displays in the vehicle. the screens. For more information on how to use this equipment, refer to the Audio equipment and telematics section. USB ports F Raise the paddle. F Raise the cover fully. 220 V/50 Hz socket 12 V accessory socket A 220 V/50 Hz socket (max. power: 120 W) is fitted in the rear storage box. This socket works with the engine running, as These allow the connection of a portable well as in STOP mode of Stop & Start. device, such as an iPod® type digital audio player, to recharge the device.

The USB port located at the front F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum also allows a smartphone to be power: 120 watts), lift the cover and plug in connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android the correct adapter. Auto® or CarPlay®, so that certain applications on the smartphone can Observe the maximum power rating to be used on the touch screen. avoid damaging your accessory.

You can manage these applications using the F Open the storage box. steering mounted controls or the audio system.

60 Ease of use and comfort F Check that the indicator lamp is on and Rear armrest F Press the flap opening control. green. F Lower the flap. F Connect your multimedia or other electrical F Load the objects from inside the boot. device (telephone charger, laptop computer, CD-DVD player, bottle warmer, etc.).

In the event of a fault with the socket, the green Do not leave the flap open when not indicator lamp flashes. carrying long objects in the vehicle. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 3 Connect only one device at a time to the Load space cover/blind socket (no extension lead or multi-socket connector). F Lower the rear armrest for a more Objects placed on the load space cover Connect only devices with class II comfortable position. can turn into projectiles during sudden insulation (shown on the device). It may be fitted with cup holders and also gives deceleration. As a safety measure, when electrical access to the ski flap. consumption is high and when required by the vehicle's electrical system (particular weather conditions, electrical overload, Ski flap etc.), the current supply to the socket will be It allows long objects to be carried in the vehicle. cut off; the green indicator lamp goes off.

The different "ports and sockets" may be either not available, an option or standard, depending on the trim level of the vehicle.

F Lower the armrest. 61 Ease of use and comfort Boot fittings (hatchback) Boot fittings (SW)

7. Rings for fixing a net (to restrain luggage) (depending on version) F Extract the rings one at a time then slide them into the oblong housing. F While pressing the button, move the ring to the desired position. F Observe the direction of fitting (rings in the vertical position towards the outside of the vehicle).

1. Rear shelf 1. Boot lamp 2. Boot floor 2. Rear seat folding controls Warning triangle (stowing) Raise the floor for access to the storage. 3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W max.) This safety equipment should be used in 3. Storage wells, where are stowed: 4. Removable storage wells addition to the hazard warning lamps. - the towing eye, Pull up to unclip them. Its presence in the vehicle may be mandatory, - the temporary puncture repair kit, 5. Storage wells, where are stowed: depending on country. - the spare wheel depending on trim - the towing eye, level, optional or as standard. - the temporary puncture repair kit, 4. Stowing rings - the spare wheel depending on trim 5. Strap (depending on version) level, optional or as standard. 6. Load space cover (see corresponding section)

62 Ease of use and comfort

F Remove the guides of the blind from the A recess in the well, underneath the boot rails in the boot pillars. carpet, allows you to load the load space cover F Release the blind, it rolls up automatically. diagonally.

Removal This recess is not available with the bass woofer unit. Installation 3 The storage location for a folded triangle or its box is under the boot floor.

Load space cover, blind (SW) F When sharp deceleration occurs, objects Place your hand underneath the load placed on the load space cover can turn space cover on the left. F into projectiles. Pivot the end of the reel towards the front (clockwise) to disengage it. F Position the left, then the right end of F Proceed in the same way for the right side the load space cover in their respective (anti-clockwise). To reel in housings. F Put your hands on the reel, then pivot the Storage whole unit towards the rear to engage it. F Unwind the blind until it locks on the boot pillar.

63 Ease of use and comfort High load (SW) 2nd row The air flow control enables you to increase or reduce the speed of the ventilation fan. F Luggage retaining net Remove the covers, on each side, in the Depending on your vehicle, the controls are upper section in the roof. accessible in the "Air conditioning" menu of This allows the use of the entire loading F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof. the touch screen or are grouped together on capacity, up to the roof: F Attach the bottom of the net to the rings the control panel of the centre console. - behind the front seats (1st row) when the located either side of the boot carpet or on rear seats are folded down, the boot rails (depending on trim level). nd - behind the rear seats (2 row). F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. Air distribution st 1 row Heating and Ventilation Air intake The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.

Controls The incoming air follows various routes F Fold down the rear seats. depending on the controls selected by the F Remove the covers, on each side, in the driver, the front passenger or rear passengers, upper section in the roof. depending on the level of equipment. F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof. The temperature control enables you to obtain F Attach the bottom of the net to the hooks the level of comfort required by mixing the air of located at the seat belt mountings. the various circuits. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. The air distribution control enables you to Once fitted, the net does not prevent folding of select the air vents used in the passenger the rear seat backrests. compartment by the combined use of the associated buttons. 1. Windscreen demisting-defrosting vents.

64 Ease of use and comfort

2. Front side window demisting-defrosting Advice If after an extended stop in sunshine, the vents. interior temperature is very high, first air 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents. Using the ventilation and air the passenger compartment for a few 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents. conditioning system moments. 5. Air outlets to the front footwells. F To ensure that the air is distributed Put the air flow control at a setting high 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells. evenly, keep the external air intake enough to quickly change the air in the grilles at the base of the windscreen, passenger compartment. the nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and the air extractor in the boot free 3 from obstructions. The condensation created by the air F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, conditioning results in a discharge of water located on the dashboard; this is used under the vehicle which is perfectly normal. for regulation of the automatic air conditioning system. F Operate the air conditioning system for Servicing the ventilation and air at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice conditioning system a month to keep it in perfect working F Ensure that the passenger compartment order. filter is in good condition and have the F If the system does not produce cold air, filter elements replaced regularly. switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT We recommend the use of a combined dealer or a qualified workshop. passenger compartment filter. Thanks to When towing the maximum load on a its special active additive, it contributes steep gradient in high temperatures, to the purification of the air breathed by switching off the air conditioning increases the occupants and the cleanliness of the the available engine power and so passenger compartment (reduction of improves the towing ability. allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the Warranty and Maintenance Record.

65 Ease of use and comfort

When the indicator lamp is on, the function is Stop & Start F If you place thumbwheel at position 2 activated. The heating and air conditioning systems 0 (off), thermal comfort will no longer only work when the engine is running. be controlled. A slight flow of air can Temporarily deactivate the Stop & still be felt, resulting from the forward The air conditioning does not operate Start system to maintain a comfortable movement of the vehicle. when the air flow adjustment is inhibited. temperature in the passenger compartment. To obtain cool air sooner, you can use For more information on Stop & Start, recirculation of the interior air for a few refer to the corresponding section. Air distribution adjustment moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air. Windscreen and side windows. Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity, condensation).

Manual air conditioning Central and side air vents. Manual air conditioning The air conditioning system operates only with (Touch screen) the engine running. Footwells. The manual air conditioning system operates with the engine running.

The air distribution can be adapted by combining the corresponding buttons. Temperature adjustment Air conditioning On/Off F Turn thumbwheel 1 from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your liking. The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed. It enables you to: Air flow adjustment - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in F Turn thumbwheel 2 to obtain a comfortable winter, above 3°C. Press the "Air conditioning" menu air flow. F Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air button to display the system controls conditioning system. page.

66 Ease of use and comfort Temperature adjustment Footwells. Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity, condensation). F Press one of the buttons 1 to decrease or increase the value. The air distribution can be adapted by using Dual-zone automatic several buttons: illumination of the indicator air conditioning (Touch Air flow adjustment lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air screen) in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp F Press one of the buttons 2 to increase or being off indicates the absence of fan boosted This air conditioning system operates with decrease the speed of the air booster fan. air in the direction indicated. the engine running, but the ventilation and its The symbol for air flow (a fan) fills progressively For a uniform distribution of air in the controls are available with the ignition on. 3 according to the air flow setting made. passenger compartment, the three buttons can Operation of the air conditioning and regulation By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are be activated simultaneously. of temperature, air flow and air distribution in stopping ventilation. the passenger compartment are automatic Air conditioning on/off according to the temperature in the passenger compartment and the temperature setting. The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows Avoid driving for too long with the closed. ventilation off (risk of misting and It enables you to: deterioration of air quality). - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3°C. Air distribution adjustment F Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air conditioning system. These buttons are used to arrange When the indicator lamp is on, the function is the distribution of air in the passenger activated. compartment by combining several air outlets. 1. Temperature. Windscreen. The air conditioning does not operate 2. Air flow. when the air flow adjustment is inhibited. 3. Air distribution. 4. Air conditioning on/off. Central and side air vents. To obtain cool air sooner, you can use Automatic comfort programme. recirculation of the interior air for a few 5. moments. Then return to the intake of exterior 6. Access to the secondary page. air. 67 Ease of use and comfort

Press the "Air conditioning" menu It is possible to modulate the This setting is associated with AUTO mode button to display the controls for the intensity of the automatic comfort only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, air conditioning system. programme by choosing one of the indicator for the last setting remains on. three mode settings offered in Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO a secondary page of the "Air mode if deactivated. Temperature adjustment conditioning" menu. To change the current setting, shown by the The driver and front passenger can each set green indicator lamp, press the button for the In cold conditions and when the engine is the temperature. desired mode: cold, to limit distribution of cold air in the F Press one of the buttons 1 to increase or passenger compartment, the air flow will decrease the air flow. change gradually until the comfort setting is reached. The value displayed corresponds to a level of On entering the vehicle, if the interior comfort and not to a precise temperature. temperature is much colder or warmer It is recommended that you avoid a than the comfort value setting, there is difference between the left and right setting no need to alter the value displayed in of more than 3. order to reach more quickly the required level of comfort. The system automatically Automatic comfort corrects the temperature difference. programme "Soft": provides soft and quiet F Press the button 5 to activate/deactivate operation by limiting air flow. the automatic mode of the air conditioning Manual control system. You can manually adjust one or more of these "Normal": offers the best When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the settings, while retaining automatic control of compromise between a comfortable air conditioning system operates automatically: the other functions: temperature and quiet operation the system manages the temperature, air - air flow, (default setting). flow and air distribution in the passenger - air distribution. compartment in an optimum way depending on "Fast": provides strong and effective As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator the comfort level you have selected. air flow. lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off.

68 Ease of use and comfort

F Press the AUTO button again to Each press on a button activates or deactivates This function does not operate the air activate the automatic comfort the function. The indicator lamp is on when the conditioning. programme again. button is activated. For a uniform distribution in the passenger compartment, all three buttons "Mono" function can be pressed simultaneously. Air flow adjustment In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three The comfort setting for the passenger's side can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting F buttons are off. Press one of the buttons 2 to increase or (mono-zone). decrease the speed of the fan. Air conditioning on/off From the secondary page of the "Air conditioning" menu: 3 The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in The air conditioning is designed to operate progressively as the speed of the fan is effectively in all seasons, with the windows F Press this button to activate/ increased. closed. deactivate the "Mono" function. By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are It enables you to: The indicator lamp in the button stopping ventilation. - lower the temperature, in summer, is on when the function is "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. - increase the effectiveness of the demisting activated. in winter, above 3°C. F Avoid driving for too long with the Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air The function is deactivated automatically when ventilation off (risk of misting and conditioning system. the passenger uses their temperature setting deterioration of air quality). When the indicator lamp under the button is on, buttons. the air conditioning function is activated. Air distribution adjustment The air conditioning does not operate when the Recirculation of interior air You can modulate the distribution of air in the air flow adjustment is set to off. passenger compartment using these three buttons. Windscreen. Ventilation function with the ignition on

Central and side air vents. When the ignition is switched on, you can use the ventilation system to adjust the air flow and air distribution settings in the passenger compartment for a duration that depends on Footwells. The intake of exterior air prevents the formation the battery charge. of mist on the windscreen and side windows.

69 Ease of use and comfort Recirculation of the interior air isolates the With manual air F Press this button to demist or defrost the passenger compartment from exterior odours windscreen and side windows as quickly as and fumes. conditioning possible. This function also allows the desired The system automatically manages the air temperature in the passenger compartment to conditioning, air flow and air intake, and be reached in the shortest time. provides optimum distribution towards the F Press this button to activate/deactivate the windscreen and side windows. function. F To stop, press this button again or on When the indicator lamp is on, the function is "AUTO". activated. The system is reactivated with the values in use before the deactivation. F Put controls and in the appropriately Avoid prolonged use of recirculation 1 2 marked position and press the "windscreen of interior air – Risk of misting and and side windows" button . With Stop & Start, when demisting – deterioration of air quality! 3 defrosting has been activated, STOP F Press button 4 for air conditioning; the mode is not available. indicator lamp in the button comes on. The system activates automatically when Rear screen demist – reverse gear is engaged. With manual or dual-zone automatic air conditioning defrost Front demist – defrost (with the touch screen) These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.

70 Ease of use and comfort On/Off Electric blind F Press the front of the control without going beyond the point of resistance. F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear The blind stops when your release the control. screen and, depending on version, the door Opening mirrors. The indicator lamp in the button comes on. You can also press or pull the control Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically beyond the point of resistance: the blind to prevent excessive electrical consumption. opens or closes completely after you release the control. F It is possible to stop the demisting/ Operating the control again stops the 3 defrosting operation before it is switched off movement of the blind. automatically by pressing this button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Switch off the demisting/defrosting of Safety anti-pinch the rear screen and door mirrors as If the blind encounters an obstacle, you soon as appropriate, as lower current F Press the rear of the control without going should reverse the movement. Use the consumption results in reduced fuel beyond the point of resistance. control to do this. consumption. The blind stops when your release the control. Remember to always switch off the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. When operating the control, the driver Rear screen demisting – defrosting can Closing should ensure that there is nothing only be operated when the engine is preventing movement of the blind. running. The driver must ensure that passengers use the blind correctly. Be aware of children when operating the Panoramic roof blind. Its electric blind improves thermal and acoustic comfort.

71 Ease of use and comfort Courtesy lamps Front – rear courtesy lamps Front – rear map reading In this position, the courtesy lamp lamps comes on gradually: F With the ignition on, operate the corresponding switch. - when you unlock the vehicle, - when the electronic key is removed from the reader, Take care not to put anything in contact - on opening a door, with the courtesy lamps. - when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle. In "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting It switches off gradually: time varies according to the circumstances: - when the vehicle is locked, - when the ignition is off, approximately - when the ignition is switched on, ten minutes, 1. Front courtesy lamp - 30 seconds after the last door is closed. 2. Front map reading lamps - in energy saving mode, approximately thirty seconds, - with the engine running, unlimited. Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

Depending on version, you can also switch the courtesy lamp on or off by pressing this button.

3. Rear courtesy lamp 4. Rear map reading lamps

72 Ease of use and comfort Footwell lighting Switching on Switching on 3

At night, the illumination of the interior opening controls on the front doors comes on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on. The ambient lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.

The brightness of the interior ambient lighting can be adjusted in the Vehicle/Driving menu. F Select the Comfort lighting menu. F Check the "Ambient lighting" line. Its operation is the same as that of the courtesy lamps. The lamps come on when one of the doors is opened. Press on the "magnifying glass" to Interior ambient lighting adjust the brightness. The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

73 Lighting and visibility Exterior lighting control Dipped or main beam headlamps. Foglamps stalk In good or rainy weather, by both day Automatic illumination of headlamps. Main lighting and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamps are prohibited. In these Selection of main lighting mode Dipping the headlamps situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or falling snow. In these weather conditions, it is your responsibility to switch on the foglamps and dipped headlamps manually as the Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with sunshine sensor may detect sufficient the marking. light. Switch off the front and rear foglamps Without AUTO lighting when they are no longer necessary.

Pull the lever to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps. In Lighting off or Sidelamps only modes, the Rear foglamp only driver can switch on the main beam headlamps With AUTO lighting directly by keeping the lever pulled. Display

Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on.

Lighting off (ignition off)/Front daytime running lamps (engine running). The main or dipped beam headlamps must be Sidelamps only. on. F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards. 74 Lighting and visibility

When the lighting is switched off automatically F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the Switching off of the lighting when the (version with AUTO lighting), the foglamp goes foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off. ignition is switched off off. On switching off the ignition, all of the F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards. lamps turn off immediately, except for Front and rear foglamps Never look too closely at the luminous dipped beam if automatic guide-me-home beam of "Full LED" headlamps: risk of lighting is activated. serious eye injury.

Switching on the lighting after the In some weather conditions (e.g. low ignition is switched off temperature or humidity), the presence To reactivate the lighting control, rotate of misting on the internal surface of the ring A to the 0 position – lamps off, then to glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is the desired position. 4 normal; it disappears after the lamps have On opening the driver's door a temporary been on for a few minutes. audible signal warns the driver that the lighting is on. They will go off automatically after a The front and rear foglamps work with the Travelling abroad period of time that depends on the state of sidelamps or dipped beam headlamps on (in Halogen headlamps charge in battery (entering energy-saving manual or auto mode). If using your vehicle in a country that mode). Push and turn the ring: drives on the other side of the road, the F once forwards to switch on the front headlamps must be adjusted to avoid foglamps, dazzling oncoming drivers. F forwards a second time to switch on the rear Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified foglamps. workshop. F once rearwards to switch off the rear LED lamps foglamps, The design of the front LED headlamps F rearwards a second time to switch off the allows driving without modification in a front foglamps. country that drives on the other side of the If the lighting is switched off automatically road to the country in which your vehicle (version with AUTO lighting) or the dipped was sold. beams are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on.

75 Lighting and visibility

come on if rain is detected, at the same time as In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may Daytime running lamps/ automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. detect sufficient light. In this case, the Sidelamps As soon as the light returns to a sufficient level lighting will not come on automatically. or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, These lamps light up automatically when the Do not cover the sunshine sensor, the lamps are switched off automatically. engine starts. integrated with the rain sensor and located at the top of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions Switching on would no longer be controlled.

Automatic headlamp dipping

F Turn the ring to the AUTO position. Activation of the function is accompanied by System which automatically changes between the display of a message. dipped and main beam according to the They provide the following functions: exterior light level and the driving conditions, - Daytime running lamps (lighting control Switching off using a camera located at the top of the stalk at position "0" or "AUTO" with windscreen. adequate light level). F Turn the ring to another position. - Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position Deactivation of the function is accompanied This system is a driving aid. "AUTO" with low light levels or "Sidelamps by the display of a message. The driver remains responsible for the only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the Operating fault prevailing conditions of light, visibility, traffic and observation of driving and Automatic illumination of In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle regulations. headlamps sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning lamp is displayed in When a low level of ambient light is detected The system will be operational as soon as the instrument panel, accompanied by the sunshine sensor, the number plate you exceed 16 mph (25 km/h). by an audible signal and/or a lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), message. are switched on automatically, without any Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the system no longer operates. action on the part of the driver. They may also workshop. 76 Lighting and visibility

If the ambient light level is very low and the traffic conditions permit:

- main beam comes on automatically: these indicator lamps come on in the instrument panel.

When the system detects thick fog, it temporarily deactivates the function. As soon as the vehicle leaves the area of thick Activation/Deactivation fog, the function reactivates automatically. 4 F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the This indicator lamp goes off while "AUTO" position. the function is deactivated. F In the Vehicle/Driving menu, select the "Driving functions" tab, then "Automatic headlamp Pause dip". If the situation requires a change of headlamp beam, the driver can take over at any time. The status of the system remains in memory when the ignition is switched off. F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function and the system changes to "automatic Operation illumination of headlamps" mode: - if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if indicator lamps are on, the system the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of changes to main beam, the main beam headlamps: - if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator - dipped beam is kept on: these lamps are on, the system changes to indicator lamps come on in the dipped beam. instrument panel. To reactivate the function, flash the headlamps again.

77 Lighting and visibility

Switching off The system may suffer interference or not Clean the windscreen regularly, The manual guide-me lighting goes off work correctly: particularly the area in front of the camera. automatically at the end of a given period of time. - under poor visibility conditions (snow, The internal surface of the windscreen can heavy rain, etc.), also become misted around the camera. Automatic - if the windscreen is dirty, misted or In humid and cold weather, demist the When the automatic illumination of headlamps obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of windscreen regularly. function is activated (lighting control stalk the camera, Do not allow snow to accumulate on the in the "AUTO" position), under low ambient - if the vehicle is facing highly reflective bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could light the dipped beams headlamps come on signs. conceal the detection camera. automatically when the ignition is switched off. When the system detects thick fog, it temporarily deactivates the function. Activation or deactivation, as well as The system is not able to detect: the duration of the guide-me-home - road users that do not have their own lighting, is set in the Vehicle/Driving lighting, such as pedestrians, Guide-me-home lighting menu, then Comfort lighting and - vehicles whose lighting is obscured Guide-me-home lighting. (for example: vehicles running behind a safety barrier on a motorway), Manual - vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. Exterior welcome lighting The remote operation of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated when the lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" position and the level of Temporarily keeping the dipped beam light detected by the sunshine sensor is low. headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor. Switching on Switching on F Press the open padlock on F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps the remote control or one of using the lighting control stalk. the front door handles with the F A further "headlamp flash" switches the "Keyless Entry and Starting" function off. system. 78 Lighting and visibility The dipped beam headlamps and the F Left: lower the lighting control stalk passing Switching on sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also the point of resistance. unlocked. F Right: raise the lighting control stalk passing When the courtesy lamp is in this the point of resistance. position, the spotlamps come on Switching off automatically: Three flashes The exterior welcome lighting switches off - when you unlock the vehicle, automatically after a set time, when the ignition F Press briefly upwards or downwards, - on switching off the ignition, is switched on or on locking the vehicle. without going beyond the point of - on opening a door, resistance; the direction indicators will flash - when a request to locate the vehicle is Programming 3 times. received from the remote control. Switching off The activation, deactivation and Door mirror spotlamps choice of welcome lighting duration They are timed to go off automatically. 4 are done in the Vehicle/Driving menu, then Guide-me-home lighting and Welcome lighting. Headlamp adjustment

Manual adjustment of the Direction indicators halogen headlamps

To make your approach to the vehicle easier, these illuminate: - the zones facing the driver’s and passenger’s doors, - the zones forward of the mirror and To avoid causing a nuisance to other road rearward of the front doors. users, the height of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

79 Lighting and visibility 0 Driver or driver + front passenger. Wiper control stalk With manual wiping (intermittent) - Driver + front passenger + rear passengers. 1 5 people. Programming - 5 people + loads in the boot. 2 Driver + loads in the boot. Your vehicle may also include some functions that can be configured: - automatic windscreen wipers, - rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. The initial setting is position "0". With AUTO wiping Automatic adjustment of In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or "Full LED" technology frost present on the windscreen, around headlamps the wiper arms and blades and the This system automatically adjusts the height windscreen seal, before operating the of the beams from this type of headlamp, wipers. according to the load in the vehicle, to avoid causing a nuisance to other road users. Front wipers

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp Do not operate the wipers on a dry Raise or lower the control stalk to the desired comes on in the instrument panel, windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold position to change the wiping speed. accompanied by a message and an conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not stuck to the windscreen before audible signal. Fast wiping (heavy rain). operating the wipers. The system then places the headlamp beams in the lowest position. Normal wiping (moderate rain). Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Manual controls Intermittent wiping (proportional to Do not touch the "Full LED" technology the speed of the vehicle). headlamps. Risk of electrocution! Off. The wipers are controlled directly by the driver.

80 Lighting and visibility Single wipe (press down or pull Activation or deactivation of this automatic Screenwash/headlamp the stalk briefly towards you, then function can be set in the touch screen. release). wash level low In the case of vehicles fitted with or F Select the menu, Vehicle/Driving headlamp washers, when the fluid then and Automatic wiping (press Comfort lighting Rear reservoir low level is reached, this . down, then release). wiper in reverse warning lamp comes on in the Single wipe (pull the stalk instrument panel, accompanied by briefly towards you). an audible signal and a message. This system is activated by default. The warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is Rear wiper operated, until the reservoir is refilled. If a significant accumulation of snow or ice Next time you stop, refill the screenwash/ 4 is present, or when using a bicycle carrier headlamp wash reservoir. on the boot, deactivate the automatic rear wiper. To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do not operate the windscreen washer if the windscreen washer reservoir is empty. Windscreen wash Only operate the windscreen washer if Rear wiper selection ring: there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. windscreen and hindering visibility. Always Off. The screenwash, then the windscreen wipers operate use windscreen washer fluid suitable for for a pre-determined time. low temperatures during the winter period.

Intermittent wiping. On vehicles fitted with automatic air conditioning, any action on the windscreen wash control results in temporary closing Special position of the Wash-wipe (set duration). of the air intake to avoid odours inside the passenger compartment. windscreen wipers This position is used for cleaning or Reverse gear replacement of the wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper wiper blades from the windscreen. will come into operation automatically if the windscreen wipers are operating. 81 Lighting and visibility

F In the minute following ignition switch-off, To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper Do not touch the wiper blade in case you any operation of the wiper control stalk will blades, it is advisable to: cause irreparable damage. position the wiper blades vertically. - handle them with care, Do not release them while moving them – F Proceed with the desired operation or the - clean them regularly using soapy Risk of damaging the windscreen! replacement of the wiper blades. water, - avoid using them to retain cardboard F on the windscreen, After refitting a front wiper blade Clean the windscreen using a windscreen - replace them at the first signs of wear. cleaning fluid.

F To return the wiper blades to their initial Do not apply "Rain X" type beading position, switch on the ignition and operate products. the wiper control stalk. F Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you Before removing a front wiper Changing a wiper blade and remove it. F Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the Removing/refitting at the arm. F Repeat the procedure for the other wiper front blade. F Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, once again hold the each arm by the rigid section, then fold it carefully, guiding it to the windscreen. Removing/refitting at the rear F Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible. F Clean the rear window using windscreen washing fluid. F F Carry out these wiper blade replacement Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it. F operations from the driver's side. Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the F Starting with the wiper blade farthest from arm. F you, hold each arm by the rigid section and Once again hold the arm by the rigid section raise it as far as possible. then fold it carefully, guiding it to the rear window. 82 Lighting and visibility

Automatic windscreen The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards, if the ignition has The windscreen wipers operate automatically been off for more than one minute. once rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rain without any action on the part of the driver. Operating fault

Switching on If a fault occurs with the automatic rain sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a 4 qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, combined with the sunshine sensor and located at the top Give a short downwards push to the control centre of the windscreen, behind the rear view stalk. mirror. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers has been accepted. when using an automatic car wash. This warning lamp comes on in the In winter, it is advisable to wait until the instrument panel and a message is displayed. windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers. Switching off Give the control stalk another short push downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).

This warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.

83 Safety

General safety We draw your attention to the following Installation of accessory radio recommendations points: communication transmitters - The fitting of electrical equipment Before installing a radio communication or accessories not approved by transmitter, you must contact a PEUGEOT PEUGEOT may cause excessive dealer for the specifications of compatible Labels are affixed in different locations on current consumption and faults and transmitters (frequency, maximum power, your vehicle. They include safety warnings failures with the electrical system of aerial position, specific installation and vehicle identification information. Do your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT requirements), in line with the Vehicle not remove them: they are an integral part dealer for information on the range of Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive of your vehicle. recommended accessories. (2004/104/EC). - As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for PEUGEOT dealers For any work on your vehicle, use a or qualified workshops, equipped qualified workshop that has the technical with the special tools required (risk information, skills and equipment required, of malfunctions of the vehicle's all of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to electronic systems that could cause Hazard warning lamps provide. breakdowns or serious accidents). The manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is not followed. Depending on country regulations, some - Any modification or adaptation not safety equipment may be compulsory: intended or authorised by PEUGEOT high visibility safety vests, warning or carried out without meeting the triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, technical requirements defined by spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, the manufacturer will result in the mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. suspension of the legal and contractual F When you press this red button, all four warranties. direction indicators flash. They can operate with the ignition off.

84 Safety Automatic operation of Pressing this button again immediately cancels Operation of the system the request; the LED goes off. hazard warning lamps When the ignition is switched on, the indicator The LED remains on (without flashing) when lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that When braking in an emergency, depending on communication is established. the system is operating correctly. the rate of deceleration, as well as when the It goes off at the end of the call. If the indicator lamp lights up continuously red: ABS function is invoked or in the event of an there is a system fault. impact, the hazard warning lamps come on "Peugeot Connect SOS" immediately locates If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the automatically. your vehicle and contacts you in your own back-up battery. They switch off automatically once you language**, and – if necessary – requests that In either case, emergency and assistance calls accelerate. relevant emergency services be dispatched**. may not function. F You can also switch them off by pressing In countries where the service is not available, Contact a qualified repairer as soon as the button. or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent directly possible. Emergency or assistance to the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location. call The system’s fault does not prevent the If an impact is detected by the airbag vehicle from being driven. 5 control unit, an emergency call is made automatically and independently of the deployment of any airbags. Peugeot Connect Assistance * In accordance with the general conditions Press this button for more than of use for the service available from dealers 2 seconds to request assistance and subject to technological and technical if the vehicle breaks down. limitations. Peugeot Connect SOS ** Depending on the geographic coverage In an emergency, press this of "Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot button for more than 2 seconds. Connect Assistance" and the official national The flashing LED and the voice language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. message confirm that the call The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT has been made to the "Peugeot CONNECT services is available from dealers Connect SOS" service*. or on the website for your country.

85 Safety

A voice message confirms that the call has If you purchased your vehicle outside the been made**. Horn PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you Pressing this button again immediately cancels to have a dealer check the configuration of the request. these services and, if desired, modify it to The cancellation is confirmed by a voice suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, message. configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice. ** Depending on the geographic coverage of "Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot Connect Assistance" and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. For technical reasons and, in particular, The list of countries covered and telematic to improve the quality of PEUGEOT services is available from dealers or on the CONNECT services to customers, the website for your country. F manufacturer reserves the right to carry Press the central part of the steering wheel. out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system. Electronic stability control Geolocation (ESC) Stability control programme incorporating the following systems: If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Packs offer with the SOS and assistance electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), pack included, there are additional - emergency braking assistance (EBA), services available to you in your personal You can deactivate geolocation by - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction space, via the website for your country. simultaneously pressing the "Peugeot Connect control, SOS" and "Peugeot Connect Assistance" - dynamic stability control (DSC), buttons, followed by pressing "Peugeot - trailer stability assist (TSA). Connect Assistance" to confirm. To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press the "Peugeot Connect SOS" and "Peugeot Connect Assistance" buttons again, followed by a press on "Peugeot Connect Assistance" to confirm.

86 Safety

Definitions Dynamic stability control (DSC) The use of snow tyres is strongly If there is a difference between the path recommended on surfaces offering low Anti-lock braking system (ABS) levels of grip. and electronic brake force followed by the vehicle and that required by distribution (EBFD) the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more This system improves the stability and wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle Anti-lock braking system manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and to the required path, within the limits of the laws (ABS) and electronic brake contributes towards improved control on corners, in of physics. force distribution (EBD) particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking. Trailer stability assist (TSA) The fixed illumination of this warning The EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by lamp indicates that there is a fault wheel. Depending on the version, your vehicle has with the ABS. a system allowing control of the vehicle to be Emergency braking assistance retained when towing a trailer, so as to avoid The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive (EBA) the risk of snaking. carefully at moderate speed. 5 In an emergency, this system permits the If these warning lamps come on, optimum braking pressure to be reached Intelligent traction control accompanied by an audible signal more quickly, therefore reducing the stopping system and a message, this indicates a distance. fault with the electronic brake force It is triggered in relation to the speed at which Depending on version, your vehicle has a distribution (EBFD) system. the brake pedal is pressed. The effect of this is system to help driving on snow: intelligent a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and traction control. an increase in braking efficiency. This system detects situations of poor surface grip that could make it difficult to move off Anti-slip regulation (ASR) or make progress on deep fresh snow or You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. compacted snow. In both cases, have the system checked by a The ASR system (also known as Traction Control) In these situations, the intelligent traction PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as optimises traction in order to limit wheel slip by control limits the amount of wheel spin to soon as possible. acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and provide the best traction and trajectory control on the engine. It also improves the directional for your vehicle. stability of the vehicle on acceleration.

87 Safety

The system(s) reactivate(s) automatically each When changing wheels (tyres and rims), Deactivation/reactivation time the ignition is switched back on or from ensure that these are approved for your In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle 31 mph (50 km/h) (except GT and GTi versions). vehicle. which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it/ Normal operation of the ABS may make ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate them manually. itself felt by slight vibration of the brake these systems, so that the wheels can move pedal. freely and regain grip. With audio system and GT/GTi versions

F Press this button again to If you need to brake in an emergency, With audio system and GT/GTi versions reactivate the DSC and ASR. press the brake pedal very firmly and keep the pressure applied.

With touch screen, except GT/GTi versions After an impact, have these systems F Press this button to deactivate F Select "Traction control" again checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a the DSC and ASR. in the Driving functions menu qualified workshop. of the touch screen to reactivate the function. With touch screen, except GT/GTi versions Dynamic stability control (DSC)/ F Select "Traction control" in the Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Driving functions menu of the Malfunction touch screen to deactivate the These systems are activated automatically ASR. Illumination of this warning lamp, every time the vehicle is started. accompanied by the display of a As soon as they detect a problem of grip or Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination message and an audible signal, trajectory, these systems act on the operation of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, indicates a fault with the system. of the engine and brakes. the display of a message as well as the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified This is indicated by this warning illumination of the indicator lamp in the button. lamp flashing in the instrument workshop to have the systems checked. panel. Reactivate the system(s) when grip conditions allow.

88 Safety

Malfunction ASR/DSC Trailer stability assist (TSA) These systems offer increased safety Should a fault occur with the system, When towing, this system reduces the risk of in normal driving, but they should not this warning lamp comes on in the the vehicle or trailer swaying. encourage the driver to take extra risks or instrument panel, accompanied by drive at high speed. the display of a message and an It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, Operation audible signal. snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip If you continue to tow a trailer, reduce your increases. It is therefore important for your The system is activated automatically when the speed and drive carefully! safety to keep these systems activated in ignition is switched on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified all conditions, and particularly in difficult The electronic stability control (ESC) must not workshop to have the system checked. conditions. have any faults. The correct operation of these If the system detects oscillations (snaking) in systems depends on observation of the movement of the trailer at speeds between The trailer stability assist system the manufacturer's recommendations 37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), it acts offers increased safety in normal regarding as much the wheels (tyres and on the brakes to stabilise the trailer and, if driving conditions, provided that the rims), braking and electronic components necessary, reduces the engine power to slow recommendations on towing a trailer are as the assembly and repair procedures down the vehicle. observed. It must not encourage the driver 5 used by PEUGEOT dealers. to take additional risks, such as towing The use of snow tyres is recommended, The correction is signalled by the a trailer in adverse operating conditions in order to be able to benefit from the flashing of this indicator lamp in the (overloading, failure to observe the trailer efficiency of these systems in winter instrument panel and illumination of nose weight, worn or under-inflated tyres, conditions. the brake lamps. faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive at In this case, it is essential to equip the too high a speed. For information on the weights and towed four wheels with tyres approved for your In certain cases, the swaying of the trailer loads, refer to the "Technical data" section or vehicle. may not be detected by the ESC system, the registration certificate for your vehicle. particularly with a light trailer. To ensure complete safety while driving with When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, a Towbar device, refer to the corresponding the system may not be able to prevent section. sudden swaying of the trailer.

89 Safety Seat belts Each of the rear seats is fitted with a three- Seat belt not fastened/ point seat belt with inertia reel and force limiter unfastened warning lamp(s) Front seat belts (except for the centre rear seat). The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic pretensioning and force limiting system. Fastening This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus 1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/ improving their protection. unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel. F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the 2. Front left seat belt warning lamp. buckle. 3. Front right seat belt warning lamp. Rear seat belts F Check that the seat belt is fastened 4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp. correctly by pulling the strap. 5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. 6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp. Unfastening From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the F Press the red button on the buckle. warning lamp(s) flashes for two minutes F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed, the warning lamp(s) remains on until the driver and/or the passenger fastens their seat belt.

90 Safety

Front and rear seat belt warning Advice Installation lamp(s) The lower part of the strap must be On switching on the ignition, warning lamp The driver must ensure that passengers positioned as low as possible on the 1 comes on in the instrument panel and the use the seat belts correctly and that they pelvis. corresponding warning lamp (2 to 6) comes on are all fastened before driving. The upper part must be positioned in the in red in the seat belt and front passenger airbag Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, hollow of the shoulder. warning lamps display, if the corresponding seat always fasten your seat belt, even for In order to be effective, a seat belt must: belt is not fastened or is unfastened. short journeys. - be tightened as close to the body as Do not interchange the seat belt buckles possible, as they will not completely fulfil their role. - be pulled in front of you with a smooth If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the The seat belts are fitted with an inertia movement, checking that it does not corresponding warning lamp (4 to 6) lights reel permitting automatic adjustment of twist, up for around 30 seconds. the length of the strap to your size. The - be used to restrain only one person, seat belt is stowed automatically when not - not show any signs of cuts or fraying, in use. - not be converted or modified to avoid The inertia reels have an automatic affecting its performance. locking device at the time of a collision, 5 during sudden braking or if the vehicle turns over. You can release the device by pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

91 Safety

- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags Maintenance In case of impact are deployed instantly and contribute towards In accordance with current safety Depending on the nature and better protection of the occupants of the regulations, for all repairs on your seriousness of the impact, the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified pyrotechnic pretensioner may be deployed passenger); immediately after the impact, workshop with the skills and equipment before and independently of the airbags. the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able Deployment of the pretensioners is hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants, to provide. accompanied by a slight discharge of - in the case of a minor or rear impact or Have your seat belts checked regularly harmless smoke and a noise, due to the in certain rollover conditions, the airbags by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge may not be deployed; the seat belt alone workshop, particularly if the straps show incorporated in the system. contributes towards ensuring your protection signs of damage. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp in these situations. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy comes on. water or a textile cleaning product, sold by Following an impact, have the seat belt The airbags do not operate when the PEUGEOT dealers. system checked, and, if necessary, ignition is switched off. replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a This equipment will only deploy once. If a qualified workshop. second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again. Instructions for children Airbags Use a suitable child seat if the passenger Impact detection zones is less than 12 years old or shorter than General information one and a half metres. System designed to contribute towards improving Never use the same seat belt to secure passenger safety (with the exception of the more than one child. rear centre passenger) in the event of violent Never allow a child to travel on your lap. collisions. The airbags supplement the action of For more information on , refer Child seats the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all except to the corresponding section. the rear centre passenger). If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:

A. Front impact zone. B. Side impact zone.

92 Safety

If fitted to your vehicle, this system protects The deployment of one or more airbags Deployment the driver and front passenger in the event of a is accompanied by a slight emission of The airbags are deployed (except the front serious side impact in order to limit the risk of smoke and a noise, due to the detonation passenger airbag if it is deactivated) in the event injury to the chest, between the abdomen and of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in of a serious frontal impact to all or part of the head. the system. frontal impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed frame, door side. individuals may experience slight irritation. from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The detonation noise associated with the The front airbag inflates between the thorax and Deployment deployment of an airbag may result in a head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the slight loss of hearing for a short time. steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in passenger's side, to cushion their forward the event of a serious side impact applied to all movement. or part of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a Malfunction horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. Front airbags If this warning lamp in the instrument The lateral airbag inflates between the front panel comes on, you must contact occupant's abdomen and head and the 5 a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified associated door trim panel. workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer deploy in the event of a crash. Curtain airbags System contributing towards greater protection Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and System which protects the driver and front the upper passenger compartment area. passenger in the event of a serious front impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax. The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. 93 Safety

Deployment Advice Front airbags The curtain airbag is deployed at the same Do not drive holding the steering wheel For the airbags to be fully effective, time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the by its spokes or resting your hands on the observe the safety recommendations event of a serious side impact applied to all or centre part of the wheel. below. part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular Passengers must not place their feet on Adopt a normal and upright sitting to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a the dashboard. position. horizontal plane and directed from the outside Do not smoke as deployment of the Fasten your seat belt, ensuring it is towards the inside of the vehicle. airbags can cause burns or the risk of positioned correctly. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or injury from a cigarette or pipe. Do not leave anything between the rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, or hit it violently. Malfunction object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything Do not fix or attach anything to the close to or in the way of the airbag release steering wheel or dashboard, this could If this warning lamp comes on in the trajectory; this could cause injuries during cause injuries on deployment of the instrument panel, you must contact their deployment. airbags. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Never modify the original definition of your workshop to have the system checked. vehicle, particularly in the area directly around the airbags. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the After an accident or if the vehicle has event of a serious impact. been stolen or broken into, have the Curtain airbags airbag systems checked. Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, In the event of a minor impact or bump on All work on the airbag system must be as this could cause head injuries when the the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a curtain airbag is deployed. over, the airbags may not be deployed. qualified workshop. If fitted to your vehicle, do not remove the In the event of a rear or front collision, Even if all of the precautions mentioned grab handles installed on the roof, they none of the lateral airbags are deployed. are observed, a risk of injury or of minor play a part in securing the curtain airbags. burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

94 Safety

Lateral airbags General points relating to Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and Use only approved covers on the seats, child seats tightened correctly. compatible with the deployment of the For child seats with a support leg, ensure lateral airbags. For information on the that the support leg is in firm and steady The regulations on carrying children are product range of seat covers suitable for contact with the floor. specific to each country. Refer to the your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer. In the front: if necessary, adjust the legislation in force in your country. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat passenger seat. backrests (clothes, etc.) as this could At the rear: if necessary, adjust the cause injuries to the thorax or arm when relevant front seat. the lateral airbag is deployed. For maximum safety, please observe the Do not sit with the upper part of the body following recommendations: any nearer to the door than necessary. - In accordance with European regulations, Remove and stow the head restraint The vehicle's front door panels include all children under the age of 12 or less before installing a child seat with backrest side impact sensors. than one and a half metres tall must on a passenger seat. A damaged door or any unauthorised or travel in approved child seats suited to Refit the head restraint once the child seat incorrectly executed work (modification or their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt has been removed. repair) on the front doors or their interior or ISOFIX mountings. 5 trim could compromise the operation of - Statistically, the safest seats in your these sensors – risk of malfunction of the vehicle for carrying children are the rear lateral airbags! seats. Child seat at the rear Such work must only be done by a - A child weighing less than 9 kg must PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. travel in the rearward facing position "Rearward facing" both in the front and in the rear.

It is recommended that children travel on When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed the rear seats of your vehicle: on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's - "rearward facing" up to the age of 3, front seat forward and straighten the backrest - "forward facing" over the age of 3. so that the "rearward facing" child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat.

95 Safety "Forward facing" Child seat at the front

When a "forward facing" child seat is installed When a child seat is installed on the front on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's , adjust the seat to the front seat forward and straighten the backrest passenger seat highest , in the so that the legs of the child in the "forward position rearmost longitudinal , . facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's position with the backrest straightened front seat.

Centre rear seat "Rearward facing" A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat.

The incorrect installation of a child seat in The front passenger airbag must be a vehicle compromises the protection of deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks the child in the event of an accident. being seriously injured or killed in case of airbag deployment.

"Forward facing"

The front passenger airbag must be activated.

96 Safety

AR

НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини BG СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето. NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí CS nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ. Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT KVÆSTET DA eller DRÆBT. Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, DE das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden. Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από EL ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the EN CHILD can occur. NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG 5 ES frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño. Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja ET avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada. ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen FI laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN. NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE FR frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT. NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi HR moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta. SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a HU gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja. NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale IT ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.

97 Safety

NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO LT PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS. NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA LV SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS. MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de NL airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, NO BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET. NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ PL POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA CIAŁA. NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. PT Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG RO frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA. ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье, защищенном RU ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo SK by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA. NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem SL AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE. NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu SR nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att SV DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT. KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya TR ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir. 98 Safety

F With the ignition off, insert the key into the Deactivating the front passenger airbag deactivation switch. passenger airbag F Turn it to the "OFF" position. F Remove the key, leaving the switch in this Never install a "rearward facing" child position. restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. When the ignition is switched on, this This could cause the death of the child or warning lamp comes on in the seat belt serious injury. For more information on the Airbags, warning lamps display screen. It stays refer to the corresponding section. on while the airbag is deactivated.

To assure the safety of your child, the front passenger airbag must be deactivated Deactivating the front when you install a "rearward facing" child passenger airbag seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being Only the front passenger airbag can be seriously injured or killed if the airbag deactivated. 5 were deployed.

Reactivating the front passenger airbag When you remove the child seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to the ON position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact. The warning label present on both sides of the passenger sun visor repeats this advice. When the ignition is switched on, this In line with current legislation, this warning is warning lamp comes on in the seat available in all of the languages required on the belt warning lamps display screen for previous pages. approximately one minute to signal that the front airbag is activated. 99 Safety

Recommended child Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg seats Approved range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three-point seat belt.

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg L4 L5 "Klippan Optima" "RÖMER KIDFIX" From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX booster (height adjuster) is used on its own. mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt.

L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" Installed in the rearward facing position.

100 Safety Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat position in the vehicle.

Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 13 kg From 9-18 kg From 15-25 kg From 22-36 kg Seat position (groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3) Up to about 1 year old From about 1 to 3 years old From about 3 to 6 years old From about 6 to 10 years old

Front passenger seat (c) (d) with height adjustment and U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R) without height adjustment (by straightening the backrest) Hatchback 5 Outer rear seats (e) U U U U

Centre rear seat (e) U (f) U (f) X X

SW

Outer rear seats (e) U U U U

Centre rear seat (e) X X X X

101 Safety

U Seat suitable for the installation of a (e) To install a child seat at the rear, rearward child seat secured using the seat belt or forward facing, move the front seat and universally approved "rearward forward, then straighten the backrest to facing" and/or "forward facing". allow enough room for the child seat and U (R) As for U, with the vehicle seat adjusted the child's legs. to the highest and fully back position. (f) A child seat with a support leg must X Seat position not suitable for installation never be installed on the centre rear of a child seat for the weight class passenger seat. indicated. Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be installed in all vehicles using the seat on a passenger seat. belt. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed. (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat. (c) Refer to the current legislation in your "ISOFIX" mountings country before installing your child in Your vehicle has been approved in accordance this seat. with the latest ISOFIX regulations. The mountings comprise three rings for each seat: When a "rearward facing" child seat is (d) The seats shown below are fitted with Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat installed on the front passenger seat, the regulation ISOFIX mountings. backrest and cushion, indicated by an ISOFIX passenger airbag must be deactivated. marking. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed. These rings are located behind covers When a "forward facing" child seat is (hatchback) or zips (SW). installed on the front passenger seat, To access them: F leave the passenger airbag activated. Unclip the covers by pulling them forward then pivot them upward (hatchback). F Pull the zips up to open them (SW).

102 Safety

Some also have an upper strap which is attached to ring B.

To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: - remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on the vehicle seat (refit it when the child seat is removed), - pass the child seat upper strap over the top of the seat backrest, centring it between the apertures for the head restraint rods, - attach the hook of the upper strap to ring B, - tighten the upper strap. A ring B, in the boot (indicated by a label), If your vehicle has a standard spare wheel of referred to as TOP TETHER, for securing the the same size as the four wheels, follow the upper strap. procedure below: The TOP TETHER secures the upper strap of F pass the strap and spring hook over the child seats that have them. In case of frontal The incorrect installation of a child seat in boot floor (in the slot), impact, this device limits the tilting of the child a vehicle compromises the protection of F raise the boot floor, 5 seat forward. the child in the event of an accident. F lift out the upper storage box, located The TOP TETHER is located on the boot floor Strictly observe the fitting instructions alongside the wheel, behind the seat backrest. provided with the child seat. F attach the spring hook to the TOP TETHER ring, F refit the storage box and boot floor. Do not use the luggage net rings (hatchback) or stowing rings (SW), located For information regarding the ISOFIX at the edges of the boot floor. child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, refer to the table showing the locations for installing ISOFIX child seats. This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle. The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are easily secured on the two rings A.

103 Safety

Recommended ISOFIX "Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base" RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX child seats (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1) (size category: B1) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18kg Also consult the user guide from the child seat’s manufacturer to find out how to install and remove the seat.

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX base" (size category: E) Is installed only in the "forward facing" Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg position. Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX Is attached to the rings A and the upper ring base which is attached to rings A. B, referred to as the TOP TETHER, using an The base has a height-adjustable support leg upper strap. that rests on the vehicle's floor. 3 seat shell angles: sitting, reclining and lying This child seat can also be used "forward down. facing". This child seat can also be used on seats This child seat cannot be secured with a seat not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this belt. case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat We recommend that you use the seat in the using the three-point seat belt. Adjust the "rearward facing" position up to the age of position of the vehicle's front seat so that the Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX 3 years. child's feet are not touching the backrest. base which is attached to rings A. The base has a height-adjustable support leg that rests on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point seat belt.

104 Safety Locations for ISOFIX child seats In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg (group 0) (group 0) From 9-18 kg (group 1) Under 13 kg Up to about From about 1 to 3 years old (group 0+) 6 months old Up to about 1 year old Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot rearward facing rearward facing forward facing 5 ISOFIX size category FGCDECDAB B1

Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX

Hatchback

IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF Outer rear seats (a+b) (c) (a) (c) (a) IL-SU

Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX

105 Safety

SW

IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF Outer rear seats (a+b) (c) (a) (c) (a) IL-SU

Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX

IUF Seat suitable for installing an Isofix (a) Move the non height-adjustable front For more information on ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forward facing", seat forward 1 notch from the longitudinal mountings and child seats and the secured using the upper strap. adjustment halfway position. The height- upper strap in particular, refer to the IL-SU Seat suitable for installing an Isofix adjustable seat must be adjusted to its corresponding section. Semi-Universal seat which is either: maximum height. - "rearward facing" fitted with an (b) Installing a cot on an outer seat prevents upper strap or a support leg, the other two rear seats from being used. Remove and stow the head restraint - "forward facing" fitted with a (c) The height-adjustable seat must be before installing a child seat with backrest support leg, adjusted to its maximum height. Move the on a passenger seat. - a cot fitted with an upper strap or a non height-adjustable front seat forward 5 Refit the head restraint when the child support leg. notches from the longitudinal adjustment seat is removed. halfway position.

106 Safety

Child lock Advice Children at the rear At rear seating positions, always leave This mechanical system prevents opening of a The incorrect installation of a child seat in sufficient space between the front seat rear door using its interior control. a vehicle compromises the protection of and: The control is located on the edge of each rear the child in the event of an accident. - a "rearward facing" child seat, door and locking is independent for each door. Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat - the child's feet for a child seat fitted belt buckle under the child seat, as this "forward facing". could destabilise it. To do this, move the front seat forwards Remember to fasten the seat belts or the and, if necessary, straighten its backrest. Locking child seat harnesses keeping the slack For optimal installation of the "forward relative to the child's body to a minimum, facing" child seat, verify that its backrest is even for short journeys. as close as possible to the backrest of the When installing a child seat using the seat vehicle seat, if possible in contact with it. belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is Children at the front 5 adjustable, move it forwards if necessary. The legislation on carrying children on the The head restraint must be removed front passenger seat is specific to each before installing a child seat with a country. Refer to the legislation in force in backrest on a passenger seat. the country in which you are driving. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or Deactivate the front passenger airbag F Using the integral ignition key, turn the attached securely to prevent it from being when a "rearward facing" child seat is control as far as it will go: thrown around the vehicle in the event installed on the front passenger seat. - to the left on the left-hand rear door, of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint Otherwise, there is a risk of serious or - to the right on the right-hand rear door. when the child seat is removed. fatal injury to the child if the airbag is deployed. Unlocking F Using the integral ignition key, turn the control as far as it will go: - to the right on the left-hand rear door, - to the left on the right-hand rear door.

107 Safety

Installing a height-adjustable (booster) seat The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs. We recommend using a height-adjustable (booster) seat with a backrest, equipped with a belt guide at shoulder level.

Additional protections To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows, use the child lock. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. As a safety precaution, do not leave: - a child or children alone and unattended in a vehicle, - a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, - the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

108 Driving

If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road: Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with Driving recommendations - check that the depth of water does not the engine running. If you have to leave Observe the driving regulations and remain exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that your vehicle with the engine running, apply vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. might be generated by other users, the parking brake and put the gearbox into Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your - deactivate the Stop & Start function, neutral or position N or P, depending on hands on the wheel so that you are ready to - drive as slowly as possible without stalling. the type of gearbox. react at any time to any eventuality. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), As a safety measure, the driver should only - do not stop and do not switch off the engine. carry out any operations that require close On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety attention when the vehicle is stationary. conditions allow, make several light brake In case of towing On a long journey, taking a break every two applications to dry the brake discs and pads. hours is strongly recommended. If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact Driving with a trailer places greater In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. demands on the towing vehicle and the need to brake and increase the distance requires extra care from the driver. from other vehicles.

Side wind F Take into account the increased sensitivity Driving on flooded roads to wind. Important! 6 Cooling We strongly advise against driving on flooded roads, as this could cause serious damage Never drive with the parking brake applied Towing a trailer on a slope increases the to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the – Risk of overheating and damage to the temperature of the coolant. electrical systems of your vehicle. braking system! As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling As the exhaust system of your vehicle capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. is very hot, even several minutes after F To lower the engine speed, reduce your switching off the engine, never park or run speed. the engine on inflammable surfaces (dry The maximum towable load on an incline grass, fallen leaves, etc.) – Risk of fire! depends on the gradient and the exterior temperature. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.

109 Driving

F If this warning lamp and the Certain driving or manoeuvring aid Starting/Switching off the STOP warning lamp come on, functions are automatically disabled if an stop the vehicle and switch off engine, remote control approved towing system is used. the engine as soon as possible. key Place the gear lever into neutral. New vehicle Do not pull a trailer before having driven at least Anti-theft protection Ignition switch approximately 620 miles (1,000 kilometres). Electronic immobiliser Braking The key contains an electronic chip which has Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. a special code. When the ignition is switched To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of on, this code must be recognised in order for engine braking is recommended. starting to be possible. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes Tyres after the ignition is switched off, and prevents F Check the tyre pressures of the towing the engine being started by anyone who does vehicle and of the trailer, observing the not have the key. recommended pressures. In the event of a fault, you are informed 1. Stop position. by illumination of this warning lamp, an 2. Ignition on position. Lighting audible signal and a message in the 3. Starting position. screen. F Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact Starting with the key of your vehicle. a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible. The parking brake must be applied.

For more information on Headlamp Keep safely, away from your vehicle, the adjustment, refer to the corresponding label attached to the keys given to you F With a manual gearbox, in neutral, fully section. when you purchased your vehicle. depress the clutch pedal. F With an automatic gearbox, in mode P or N, fully depress the brake pedal.

110 Driving

F Insert the key in the ignition switch. If the engine does not start straight away, Switching off using the key The system recognises the starting code. switch off the ignition. F Unlock the steering column by F Immobilise the vehicle. Wait a few seconds before restarting the simultaneously turning the steering wheel F Turn the key towards you to position 1 engine. If the engine does not start after and the key. (Stop). several attempts, do not keep trying: you F Remove the key from the ignition switch. risk damaging the starter motor or the F To lock the steering column, turn the In some situations, you may have to apply engine. steering wheel until it locks. some force to turn the wheels (if the Call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified wheels are turned towards the pavement, workshop. for example). To facilitate unlocking of the steering In temperate conditions, do not leave column, the front wheels should be F With a petrol engine, operate the starter the engine at idle to warm up but move straight before switching off the engine. motor by turning the key to position 3 off straight away and drive at moderate without pressing the accelerator pedal, speed. until the engine starts. Once the engine is F Check that the parking brake is running, release the key. correctly applied, particularly on F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to Never leave the engine running in sloping ground. position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine an enclosed area without adequate • With a manual parking brake, the pre-heating system. ventilation: internal combustion engines lever must be pulled up. emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon 6 F Wait until this warning lamp goes monoxide. Risk of intoxication and death. off in the instrument panel then In severe wintry conditions (temperature • With an electric parking brake, the operate the starter motor by below -23°C), the engine should be left indicator lamp in the control lever turning the key to position 3 without at idle for 4 minutes before moving off to must be on. pressing the accelerator pedal, ensure the correct operation and life of the until the engine starts. Once the mechanical parts of your vehicle, engine Never switch off the ignition before the engine is running, release the key. and gearbox. vehicle is at a complete stop.

In wintry conditions, the warning lamp can When leaving the vehicle, remove the key stay on for a longer period. and lock the doors. If the engine is warm, the warning lamp does not come on. 111 Driving

F Place the electronic key inside the vehicle, Switching off the engine leads to a loss of The presence of the "​Keyless Entry in the recognition zone. braking assistance. and Starting" system electronic key is F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place crucial in the recognition zone. For safety the gear lever in neutral then fully depress reasons, do not leave this zone while the Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key the clutch pedal. engine is running. or the remote control, which would weigh F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, A message is displayed if the electronic down on its blade in the ignition switch from mode P or N, fully depress the brake key is not detected in the zone. Move the and could cause a malfunction. pedal. electronic key into the zone to be able to F Press the "START/STOP" button. start the engine. Key left in The steering column unlocks and the engine If the key has been left in the ignition starts more or less instantly. switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the (Read the warning for Diesel versions.) ignition will be switched off automatically If one of the starting conditions is not met, after one hour. a reminder message is displayed in the To switch the ignition back on, turn the key For , in sub-zero instrument panel. In some circumstances, to position 1 (Stop), then back to position Diesel vehicles temperatures the engine will not it is necessary to turn the steering wheel 2 (Ignition on). start until the pre-heater warning slightly while pressing the "START/STOP" lamp has gone off. button to assist unlocking of the steering Starting/Switching off the If this warning lamp comes on column; a message warns you when this engine, "​Keyless Entry after pressing the "START/STOP" is needed. button, press down on the brake and Starting" or clutch pedal until the warning With Petrol engines, after a cold start, lamp goes off, without pressing Starting preheating the catalytic converter can the "START/STOP" button again, cause clearly-felt engine vibrations for until the engine starts and runs. anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with the engine running (accelerated idle speed).

112 Driving Switching off Key not detected F Press the "START/STOP" button. The engine starts. F Immobilise the vehicle. Back-up starting F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, Back-up switch-off press the "START/STOP" button. If the electronic key is not detected or is no The engine stops and the steering column longer in the recognition zone, a message locks. appears in the instrument panel when closing a door or trying to switch off the engine. F To confirm the instruction to switch off the If the vehicle is not immobilised, the engine, press the "START/STOP" button for engine will not stop. about five seconds. In the event of a fault with the electronic key, Switching the ignition on contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (without starting) workshop. With the ​Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key inside the vehicle, pressing the "START/ Emergency switch-off STOP" button, without pressing any of the In the event of an emergency only, the engine pedals, allows the ignition to be switched on. can be switched off without conditions (even This also allows the accessories to be used (for when driving). example: audio system, lighting, etc.). 6 If the electronic key is in the recognition zone Press the "START/STOP" button for about five seconds. F Press the "START/STOP" button, the and your vehicle does not start after pressing instrument panel comes on but the engine the "START/STOP" button: In this case, the steering column locks as soon does not start. F Place the electronic key in the reader. as the vehicle stops. On certain versions with the automatic gearbox F Press the button again to switch off the F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. lock. F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P then fully Key left in the ignition With the ignition on, the system depress the brake pedal. You will be warned by a message if the automatically goes into energy economy electronic key is still in the reader on mode to maintain an adequate state of opening the driver's door. charge in the battery. 113 Driving

- By briefly pulling the control lever to apply Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the Manual parking brake the brake, application and release of the manual - By briefly pushing the control lever, parking brake. Application pressing the brake pedal as you do so, to release it. F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise your The indicator lamp in the control lever vehicle. Electric parking brake flashes during manual application or release. Release

In the event of a battery failure, the electric parking brake no longer works. As a safety measure, if the parking brake is not applied: With a manual gearbox, immobilise the vehicle by engaging a gear. The system applies the parking brake on With an EAT6 automatic gearbox, F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the switching off the engine and releases it as the immobilise the vehicle by moving the parking brake lever up gently, press the vehicle moves off. selector lever to P. release button then lower the lever fully. With an EAT8 automatic gearbox, immobilise the vehicle by putting a chock Indicator lamp against one of the wheels. When the vehicle is being driven, this Call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified indicator lamp coming on, accompanied This indicator lamp comes on in the workshop. by an audible signal and a message, instrument panel and in the control indicates that the parking brake is still lever to confirm the application of the applied or has not been fully released. parking brake. It goes off to confirm the release of the parking When parking on a slope, direct your brake. Never leave a child alone inside the wheels against the kerb, apply the parking The driver can take over at any time to apply vehicle with the ignition on, as they could brake, engage a gear and switch off the or release the parking brake, by operating the release the parking brake. ignition. control lever.

114 Driving

The complete release of the parking When towing a trailer, parking on a steep Manual release brake is confirmed by the brake slope, or if your vehicle is heavily loaded, indicator lamp and the P indicator With the ignition on or the engine running, to turn the front wheels towards the kerb and lamp in the control lever going off, release the parking brake: engage a gear. accompanied by the display of a F press the brake pedal, When towing a trailer, your vehicle is message. F briefly push the control lever. approved for parking on slopes of up to 12%. The complete release of the parking brake is When stationary with the engine running, do not confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, you risk releasing the parking brake. accompanied by the display of a message and The technology adopted for the electric an audible signal until the doors are closed. parking brake does not allow the fitment of 15-inch wheels. Automatic application With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is If you push the control lever without automatically applied when the ignition is pressing the brake pedal, the parking Automatic release switched off. brake will not be released and a message Ensure first that the engine is running and the Application of the parking brake is is displayed. driver's door is properly closed. confirmed by illumination of the brake The electric parking brake releases indicator lamp and the P indicator Manual application automatically and progressively when the lamp in the control lever, accompanied 6 vehicle moves off. by the display of a message. With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the With a manual gearbox: fully depress the control lever. clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse; Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by press the accelerator pedal and release the With the engine stalled or in STOP mode flashing of the indicator lamp in the control clutch pedal. of Stop & Start, automatic application lever. With an automatic gearbox: select position D, does not take place. Application of the parking brake is M or R then press the accelerator pedal. confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator With automatic operation, you can also lamp in the control lever, accompanied manually apply or release the parking by the display of a message. brake at any time using the control lever.

115 Driving

The complete release of the parking The area in front of the electric parking Immobilisation of the vehicle brake is confirmed by the brake indicator brake control is not intended for the with the engine running lamp and the P indicator lamp in the storage of objects. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine control lever going off, accompanied by running, briefly pull the control lever. the display of a message. Application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake F Switch off the ignition. indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, accompanied by With the EAT8 automatic gearbox, mode P the display of a message. is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. Parking the vehicle with the The wheels are blocked. brake released For more information on the EAT8 Recommendations automatic gearbox, particularly in In the case of very cold conditions (ice), relation to leaving the vehicle in free- towing and using a car wash tunnel, it is wheeling mode, refer to the corresponding recommended that the parking brake not section. be applied. To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear or mode P (Park) or fit a chock against Deactivating automatic one of the wheels. operation In some situations, for example when it is F Switch off the engine. extremely cold or during towing (caravan, Before leaving the vehicle, check that the Application of the parking brake is confirmed breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate parking brake is applied: the parking brake by illumination of the indicator lamps in the automatic operation of the system. indicator lamps in the instrument panel instrument panel and the control lever. F Start the engine. and the control lever must be on fixed. F Switch on the ignition again, without starting F Apply the parking brake with the control If the parking brake is not applied, there the engine. lever, if it is released. is an audible signal and a message is F Release the parking brake manually by F Take your foot off the brake pedal. displayed on opening the driver's door. pushing the control lever while keeping your foot on the brake pedal.

116 Driving

F Push and hold the control lever in the pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle. The hill start assist system cannot be release direction for at least 10 seconds and Braking takes place for as long as the control deactivated. no more than 15 seconds. lever is being pulled. It is interrupted if the F Release the control lever. control lever is released. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being F Press and hold the brake pedal. The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of held in the hill start assist phase. F Pull the control lever in the apply direction the vehicle during emergency braking. If you need to leave the vehicle with the for 2 seconds. If the emergency braking malfunctions, engine running, apply the parking brake the "Parking brake faulty" message will be manually. Then check that the parking displayed. Deactivation of the automatic functions brake warning lamp is on fixed in the is confirmed by illumination of this instrument panel. indicator lamp in the instrument panel.

F Release the control lever and the brake pedal. If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction, signalled by the illumination of one or both From now on, the parking brake can only indicator lamps in the instrument panel, then be applied and released manually using the stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. control lever. In this event, stability must be assured by the Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" operation. actions on the control lever until the vehicle is Reactivation of automatic operation is immobilised. confirmed by the indicator lamp in the 6 instrument panel going off. Hill start assist Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle System which keeps your vehicle immobilised is held for a short time when you release the temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when brake pedal. Emergency braking starting on a gradient, the time it takes to With a manual gearbox, if you are in first gear move your foot from the brake pedal to the or in neutral. The emergency braking should only be accelerator pedal. With an automatic gearbox, if you are in used in an exceptional situation. It is only active when: position D or M. - the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal, In the event of a failure of the main service - certain slope conditions are met, brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver - the driver’s door is closed. taken ill, under instruction, etc.), a continuous

117 Driving 5-speed manual gearbox 6-speed manual gearbox Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5th or 6th gear

Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for a short time when you release the brake pedal. F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the F Move the gear lever fully to the right to gear lever in neutral. engage 5th or 6th gear. Operating fault F Move the gear lever to the right, then pull it back. Failure to follow this advice could cause permanent damage to the gearbox rd th Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle (inadvertent engagement of 3 or 4 If a fault in the system occurs, this warning is stationary with the engine at idle. gear). lamp comes on accompanied by a message. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Engaging reverse gear workshop to have the system checked. As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.

118 Driving F Raise the ring under the knob and move the Gear selector module M.+/- Manual operation gear lever to the left, then forwards. Sequential changing of the gears. F Push towards the + sign to change up a gear. Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle or F is stationary with the engine at idle. Push towards the – sign to change down a gear. 1. Sport programme. As a safety precaution and to facilitate or starting the engine: Driver Sport Pack. - always select neutral, 2. Snow programme. - press the clutch pedal.

EAT6 automatic gearbox Steering mounted controls Six-speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic P. Park. (Only for vehicles equipped with the Driver operation, enhanced by sport and snow - Vehicle immobilised, parking brake Sport Pack.) programmes, or manual gear changing. applied or released. There are two driving modes: - Starting the engine. - operation for electronic Reverse. 6 automatic R. management of the gears by the gearbox, - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle • with the sport programme to give you a stationary, engine at idle. more dynamic driving style, N. Neutral. • or the snow programme to improve - Vehicle immobilised, parking brake driving in the event of poor grip. applied. - manual operation for sequential changing - Starting the engine. of the gears by the driver. D. Automatic operation.

Press behind the right control to increase the gear. Press behind the left control to decrease the gear. 119 Driving

F Start the engine. The steering mounted controls do not Automatic operation If the conditions are not met, there is an audible allow neutral to be selected and reverse signal, accompanied by a message on the F Select position D for automatic changing of gear to be engaged or disengaged. instrument panel screen. the six gears. F With the engine running, press the brake The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive Displays on the instrument panel pedal. mode, without any intervention on the part F Release the parking brake, unless it is of the driver. It continuously selects the most programmed to automatic mode. suitable gear according to the style of driving, F Select position R, D or M. the profile of the road and the load in the F Gradually release the brake pedal. vehicle. The vehicle moves off immediately. For maximum acceleration without touching the selector, press the accelerator fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes down automatically or holds the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. When you move the gear selector in the gate If position N is selected inadvertently while When braking, the gearbox changes down to select a position, the corresponding symbol driving, allow the engine to return to idle, automatically to provide effective engine appears in the instrument panel. then select position D to accelerate. braking. P. Parking For better safety, the gearbox will not change R. Reverse up if you release the accelerator sharply. If position , or is selected when the N. Neutral R D M engine is running at idle, with the brakes Never select position while the vehicle is D. Drive (automatic operation) N released, the vehicle moves even without moving. S. Sport programme the accelerator being pressed. Never select position P or R unless the vehicle T Snow programme . Never leave children unsupervised inside is completely stationary. 1 to 6.Gear engaged during manual operation the vehicle with the engine running. -. Instruction not accepted in manual When carrying out maintenance with the operation. engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P. Starting the vehicle F With your foot on the brake, select position P or N.

120 Driving "Sport" and "Snow" F Press the "SPORT" button once Changing from one gear to another only the engine has started. occurs if the vehicle speed and engine speed programmes "S" appears in the instrument panel. conditions allow; otherwise the gearbox will These two special programmes supplement operate temporarily in automatic mode. the automatic operation in specific conditions For more information on the Driver Sport of use. Pack, refer to the corresponding section. D disappears, and the gears "Sport" engaged appear in succession on the instrument panel. F Press the "SPORT" button once Return to automatic operation the engine has started. If the engine is under-revving or over-revving, F At any time, press the button selected (S or "S" appears in the instrument panel. the gear selected flashes for a few seconds, "T") again to quit the programme engaged then the actual gear engaged is displayed. and return to auto-adaptive mode. The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic It is possible to change from position D style of driving. (automatic) to position M (manual) at any time. On versions fitted with the Driver Sport Pack, When the vehicle is stationary or moving the "S" button is replaced by the "SPORT" very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 button. automatically. Manual operation The sport and snow programmes are inactive "Snow" in manual operation. To reduce fuel consumption when at F Press this button once the a prolonged standstill with the engine 6 engine has started. running (traffic jam, etc.), put the "T" appears in the instrument panel. selector in position N and apply the Invalid value during manual The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery parking brake. operation roads. This symbol is displayed if a gear is This programme improves starting and F Select position M for sequential changing not engaged correctly (gear selector handling when traction is poor. of the six gears. between two positions). F Push towards the + sign to change up a Driver Sport Pack gear. Stopping the vehicle F Push towards the – sign to change down a Before switching off the engine, you can This function favours a dynamic style of driving. gear. engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral.

121 Driving

In both cases, apply the parking brake to P. Park. There is a risk of damage to the gearbox: immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed For parking the vehicle: the front wheels - if you press the accelerator and brake to automatic mode. are blocked. pedals at the same time, R. Reverse. - if you force the selector from position P If the selector is not in position P, when the to another position when the battery is N. Neutral. driver's door is opened or approximately flat. For moving the vehicle with the ignition off: 45 seconds after the ignition is switched in certain car wash stations, if towing the off, an audible signal sounds and a vehicle, etc. message appears. D. Automatic mode. F Return the gear selector to position The gearbox manages gear changes P; the audible signal stops and the EAT8 automatic gearbox according to the style of driving, the road message disappears. Eight-speed automatic gearbox with push profile and the vehicle load. selector. It also offers a manual mode with M. Manual mode. Operating fault steering mounted paddle gear changes. The driver changes gear using the steering mounted control paddles.

When the ignition is on, a message appears in the instrument panel screen Gearbox selector positions Push selector to indicate a gearbox fault.

In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial jolt when changing from P to R and from N to R. This will not cause any damage to the gearbox. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

122 Driving

A. P button. The selector returns to its initial position when The steering mounted control paddles To put the gearbox into Parking mode. released. cannot be used to engage neutral or to B. Unlock button. For example, to change from P to R, you can select or come out of reverse. To unlock the gearbox and come out of P optionally push forward twice without passing or change to R, with the foot on the brake the rpoint of resistance or push once beyond pedal. the point of resistance: Displays in the instrument panel This button should be pressed and held - In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to before moving the selector. N, then from N to R. With the ignition on, the status of the gearbox is - In the second case, the gearbox goes displayed in the instrument panel: C. M button. directly from to . P: park. To change from automatic mode D to P R R: reverse. permanent manual mode. N: neutral. D. Gearbox state indicators (P, R, N, D). Steering mounted controls D1...D8: automatic mode. S: Sport programme or Driver Sport Pack. In mode M or D , the steering mounted control M1...M8: manual mode. paddles allow the driver to change gear -: instruction not accepted in manual mode. manually. If the driver's door is opened with the ignition on, a message is displayed asking you to put the gearbox into mode P. The state of the gearbox is displayed in the 6 instrument panel for a few moments after switching off the ignition.

Operation With the engine running, if it is necessary to press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button in order to change mode, an alert message is F Pull the right-hand " " paddle toward you + displayed in the instrument panel. and release to change up a gear. Only appropriate attempted changes of mode Move the selector by pressing it forward (N F Pull the left-hand " " paddle toward you and - are accepted. or R) or rearward (N or D) once or twice, release to change down a gear. if necessary going beyond the point of resistance. 123 Driving

To select reverse: If you exceed the time limit of five seconds, With the engine running and the brakes F slow down until you come to a stop, the gearbox engages mode P; you should then released, if R, D or M is selected, the F with your foot on the brake pedal, press the restart the procedure. vehicle moves off, even without pressing Unlock button, the accelerator pedal. F select mode R while continuing to press the Never leave children unsupervised in the brake pedal and the Unlock button. vehicle when the engine is running. If you open the driver's door when mode N is engaged, an audible signal will sound. It will stop when you close the driver's door To select manual mode: again. Never press the accelerator and brake F while having mode D selected in advance, pedals at the same time – Risk of damage F press button M; the indicator lamp in the to the gearbox! button comes on. In the event of a battery failure, you To quit manual mode: Special aspects of automatic must place the chock supplied with the F push forwards once to go back to D. mode vehicle tools against one of the wheels to or The gearbox selects the gear that offers immobilise the vehicle. F press button M; the indicator lamp in the optimum performance, taking account of the button goes off. exterior temperature, the profile of the road, the load on the vehicle and the style of driving. General information For maximum acceleration without touching the To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must selector, push the accelerator to the floor (kick- To unlock the gearbox: be stationary. - from mode P: down). The gearbox shifts down automatically F fully depress the brake pedal, Changing to free-wheel or holds the gear selected until the maximum F press the Unlock button, To put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode with engine speed is reached. F select another mode while continuing to the engine switched off: The steering mounted controls allow the driver press the brake pedal and the Unlock F with the vehicle stationary and the engine to temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle button. running, select N, speed and engine speed permit. - from the neutral position N, at a speed F switch off the engine, F within five seconds, switch the ignition on below 3 mph (5 km/h): Special aspects of manual mode F fully depress the brake pedal, again, F select another mode while continuing to F with the foot on the brake pedal, push the The change from one gear to another takes press the brake pedal. selector forward or back once to confirm N place only if the vehicle speed and engine and manually release the electric parking speed permit. brake, F switch off the ignition.

124 Driving

Activating the Driver Sport Pack is not Starting the vehicle If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, recommended in the following situations: From mode P: never try to start the engine by pushing - ASR system deactivated, F Press the brake pedal down fully. the vehicle. - low fuel level reached, F Start the engine. - low AdBlue level reached. F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, press the Unlock button. Stopping the vehicle F Push once or twice rearward to select the Whatever the state of the gearbox when the automatic mode D, or forward to engage ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged reverse R. automatically, with the exception of mode N, From neutral N: in which case mode P will be engaged after F Press the brake pedal down fully. a delay of 5 seconds (allowing the change to F Start the engine. free-wheel). F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, Check that mode P has been engaged and that push rearward to select the automatic the electric parking brake has been applied Pressing this button has no effect when mode , or forward, while pressing the D automatically; if not, apply it manually. towing a connected trailer. Unlock button to engage reverse R. Then, from D or R: Pressing the front part of the control activates F Release the brake pedal. The corresponding indicator lamps for the . The indicator lamp F Accelerate progressively to automatically the selector and the electric parking Driver Sport Pack comes on. release the electric parking brake. brake control lever must be on, as well Pressing this control again deactivates the F With the parking brake released, the vehicle as the ones in the instrument panel. 6 function. The indicator lamp goes off. then moves off. For more information on the Driver Sport SPORT/ECO control Pack, refer to the corresponding section. Driver Sport Pack Eco mode With the engine running, when the Driver In severe wintry conditions (temperature Sport Pack is activated, the gearbox delays Activating this mode reduces fuel consumption below -23°C), it is recommended that the changing up for a more dynamic driving style. by optimising the operation of the heating and engine be allowed to run for a few minutes The programme is automatically deactivated air conditioning and, depending on version, the before moving off, to ensure the correct when the ignition is switched off. pedals, the automatic gearbox and the gear operation and durability of the engine and shift indicator. gearbox.

125 Driving

With a petrol engine, switching into "free- control paddles are inoperative, mode M is no wheeling" is encouraged to slow the vehicle longer available. You may feel a pronounced Driver Sport Pack down without using engine braking. jolt when engaging reverse. This does not This pack changes: present any risk for the gearbox. - the visual ambience, with specific back- Activation/Deactivation lighting in the instrument panel, Malfunction of the selector - the acoustic ambience of the engine, - the level of power assistance for the steering, In the event of a minor fault - acceleration, You are alerted by this warning lamp - the way in which gear changes are managed lighting up, accompanied by the display in the automatic gearbox, F To deactivate or activate this mode, press of a message and an audible signal. This function is only available when Park this button. Drive cautiously and go to a PEUGEOT dealer Assist is not selected and snow mode in The indicator lamp is illuminated when the or a qualified workshop. the automatic gearbox is not selected. system is activated. In certain cases, the selector indicator lamps If Park Assist is activated, this may not come on, but the state of the gearbox automatically deactivates the function. is still displayed in the instrument panel.

Operating faults In the event of a serious fault With an automatic gearbox, gear changes You are alerted by the illumination of are faster. Malfunction of the gearbox this warning lamp. This is signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by the Activation of the Driver Sport Pack display of a message and an audible Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away acts like the Sport programme on the signal, when the ignition is switched from the traffic, and call a PEUGEOT operation of the gearbox. on. dealer or a qualified workshop. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified When the ignition is switched off, the workshop. gearbox goes into mode P automatically. Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), while observing the speed limit. The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode D is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted

126 Driving Activation Display of the dynamic Gear shift indicator vehicle parameters (Depending on engine.)

This system reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate gear.

Operation Depending on the driving situation and your F To display this information in the instrument vehicle's equipment, the system may advise panel, press the end of the wiper control you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can F Press and hold the Sport button until stalk. follow this instruction without engaging the the ambience of the back-lighting in the intermediate gears. instrument panel changes. Gear shift recommendations are for information The indicator lamp for the button comes on. only. In fact, the road layout, the traffic density and safety remain the deciding factors when choosing the best gear. The driver therefore If the LED flashes, activation is not remains responsible for deciding whether or not possible (for example if Park Assist or to follow the indications issued by the system. snow mode is selected) and so the back- This function cannot be deactivated. 6 lighting returns to its normal mode. If the flashing of the LED persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F Press repeatedly to go from one screen to another. With an automatic gearbox, the system is only active in manual mode. This telemetry information (longitudinal and lateral acceleration, power produced, The information appears in the turbocharger pressure, etc.) is given as an instrument panel in the form of an indication only. ascending or descending arrow and a recommended gear.

127 Driving

- With a manual gearbox, at speeds below The system adapts its gear shift Special cases: STOP mode not 2 mph (3 km/h) (with BlueHDi 130 S&S recommendation according to the driving available engine) or with the vehicle stationary (other conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the engines), when you place the gear selector STOP mode does not activate, mainly when: driver’s requirements (power, acceleration, in neutral and release the clutch pedal. - the vehicle is on a steep slope (rising or braking, etc.). - With an automatic gearbox, vehicle falling), The system never suggests: stationary, when you press the brake pedal - the driver's door is open, - engaging first gear, or place the gear selector lever in position N. - the driver's seat belt is not fastened, - engaging reverse gear. - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last engine start by the Stop & Start Stop & Start time counter driver, (minutes/seconds or hours/ - the electric parking brake is applied or being The Stop & Start system puts the engine minutes) applied, temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during - the engine is needed to maintain a stops in traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc.). The comfortable temperature in the passenger A time counter calculates the time spent in STOP engine restarts automatically – START mode – compartment, mode during a journey. as soon as you want to move off. - demisting is active, It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and - some temporary conditions (battery charge, silently. engine temperature, braking assistance, For your comfort, during parking Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system exterior temperature, etc.) make this manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available reduces fuel consumption and exhaust necessary to ensure control of a system. for a few seconds after coming out of emissions as well as the noise level when reverse gear. stationary. The Stop & Start system does not modify the vehicle's functions, such as, for In this case, this indicator lamp flashes example, braking, power steering, etc. for a few seconds then goes off. Operation A slight delay between the vehicle stopping and the engine cutting out may This operation is perfectly normal. Going into engine STOP mode be noticed.

This indicator lamp comes on in the Going into engine START mode instrument panel and the engine goes Never refuel with the engine in STOP into standby automatically: mode; you must switch off the ignition. This indicator lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically:

128 Driving - With a manual gearbox, when you fully Deactivation/Reactivation With the touch screen button depress the clutch pedal. The function is activated/deactivated in - With an automatic gearbox: In certain cases, such as the need to maintain the menu of the touch • gear selector in position D or M, when a comfortable temperature in the passenger Vehicle/Driving you release the brake pedal, compartment, it may be useful to deactivate the screen. • or gear selector in position N and brake Stop & Start system. Select the "Driving functions" then "Stop pedal released, when you place the gear The system can be deactivated at any time, once & Start". selector in position D or M, the ignition is switched on. • or when you engage reverse. If the engine is in STOP mode, it restarts Deactivation is confirmed by a message in the immediately. instrument panel. The Stop & Start system is reactivated A new selection reactivates the system. automatically every time the ignition is switched on. Reactivation is confirmed by a message in the Special cases: START mode With the button on the instrument panel. activated automatically dashboard

START mode is activated automatically if: Opening the bonnet - you open the driver's door, - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h), - the electric parking brake is being Before doing anything under the bonnet, 6 applied, deactivate the Stop & Start system to - some temporary conditions (battery avoid any risk of injury resulting from an charge, engine temperature, braking F Press this button; the associated orange automatic change to START mode. assistance, air conditioning setting, indicator lamp comes on. etc.) require the engine to be running to Deactivation is confirmed by a message in the control the system or the vehicle. instrument panel. Pressing the button again reactivates the In this case, this indicator lamp flashes system; the associated indicator lamp goes off. for a few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

129 Driving

The button indicator lamp flashing. Driving on flooded roads Memorising speeds Touch screen or Linked to the speed limiter and programmable This warning lamp flashing in the cruise control only, this function allows speed instrument panel. limits to be registered which will then be suggested as settings for these two systems. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a You can memorise several speed settings for qualified workshop. each system. Before driving in a flooded area, it is If a fault occurs in STOP mode, the vehicle may By default, some speed settings are already strongly recommended that you deactivate stall. memorised. the Stop & Start system. All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on. For more information on Driving Depending on the version, an alert message may recommendations, particularly on also be displayed, asking you to place the gear flooded roads, refer to the corresponding lever in position N and put your foot on the brake section. pedal. As a safety measure, the driver must You must switch off the ignition, then start the only modify the speed settings when Operating fault engine again. stationary.

The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V battery with a special specification and technology. Changing a speed setting All work on this type of battery must be This function can be accessed in the carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or Vehicle/Driving menu of the touch a qualified workshop. screen. For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section. F Select the "Driving functions" tab. System malfunction is signalled by the display F Select the "Adjusting Speeds" function. of a message and, depending on version, by: F Press "ON" to activate the function. F Select the speed settings from 1 to 5 that you want to use. F Select the speed setting you want to change.

130 Driving

The automatic reading of road signs is a driving assistance system and does not always display speed limits correctly. The speed limit signs present on the road always take priority over the display by the system. The system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part - Speed limit signs detected by the camera. of the driver. - Speed limit details from the navigation The driver must observe the driving F Enter the new value using the numeric system mapping. regulations and must adapt the speed of keyboard and confirm. the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic. F Confirm to store the changes and exit the The system may not display the speed menu. limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset period. You should update your navigation Speed Limit recognition The system is designed to detect signs mapping regularly in order to receive that conform to the Vienna Convention on and recommendation accurate speed limit information from the road signs. system. This function is a driving aid that cannot, in any circumstances, replace the driver’s 6 own vigilance nor compliance with the The speed limit units (mph or km/h) highway code. depend on the country you are driving in. To maintain correct operation of the The actual signs always take priority over This should be taken into account in order system: regularly clean the area in front of the display by the system. to observe the speed limit. the camera. The signs must comply with the Vienna For the system to operate correctly when The internal surface of the windscreen can Convention on road signs. you change country, the units for speed in also become misted around the camera. the instrument panel must be those for the In humid and cold weather, demist the country you are driving in. windscreen regularly. This system allows the maximum authorised speed to be displayed in the instrument panel, according to the speed limits in the country in which you are driving, using:

131 Driving

- windscreen area located in front of the Specific speed limits, such as those for camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow- heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. covered, damaged or covered by a sticker, The display of the speed limit in the - fault with the camera, instrument panel is updated as you pass - obsolete or incorrect mapping, a speed limit sign intended for cars (light The system is active but is not detecting speed - obstructed road signs (by other vehicles, vehicles). limit information. vegetation, snow), - speed limit signs that do not conform to the standard, are damaged or distorted. Activation/Deactivation By default, the system is automatically On detection of speed limit information, the activated at every engine start. system displays the value. Recommendation The function is activated and deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle Operating limits menu of the touch screen. The legislation on speed limits is specific to each country. Displays in the instrument panel The system does not take account of reduced speed limits in the following cases: In addition to Speed Limit recognition and - poor weather (rain, snow), recommendation, the driver can keep the - atmospheric pollution, speed displayed as a speed setting for the - when towing, speed limiter or cruise control using the speed - driving with a space-saver type spare wheel limiter or cruise control stalk storage button. or snow chains fitted, - puncture repair using the temporary repair kit, For more information on the Speed - young drivers, etc. limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive The following situations may interfere with cruise control, refer to the corresponding the operation of the system or prevent it from sections. 1. Detected speed limit indication. working: or - poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, 2. Indication of the end of the speed limit. falling snow, rain, fog),

132 Driving

Steering mounted controls On detection of a sign offering a new speed limit, the system displays the value and MEM Speed limiter flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it a This system prevents the vehicle new speed setting. from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

The speed limiter is switched on manually. If there is a difference of less than 6 mph The minimum programmed speed is 19 mph 1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode. (10 km/h) between the speed setting and (30 km/h). The programmed speed value remains in the 2. Memorise a speed setting. the speed displayed by the Speed Limit recognition and recommendation, the system memory when the ignition is switched off. Display in the instrument panel MEM symbol is not displayed. The speed limiter is a driving aid that F Press button 2 once to request saving of cannot, in any circumstances, replace the the speed suggested. need to observe speed limits or the need A message is displayed to confirm the request. for vigilance on the part of the driver. 3. Speed limit indication. 4. Offer to memorise the speed. Steering mounted control 5. Current speed setting. 6 Memorising the speed

F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. Speed limiter/cruise control information is F Press button 2 again to confirm and save displayed. the new speed setting. After a predetermined period, the screen returns to the current display.

133 Driving

1. Select speed limiter mode. 8. Programmed speed value. To modify the limit speed setting using 2. Decreases the set value. 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit memorised speeds and from the touch screen: 3. Increases the set value. recognition and recommendation system F press button 5 to display the memorised speed settings, 4. Speed limiter On/Pause. (depending on version). F press the button for the desired speed 5. Depending on version: setting. Display of speed thresholds in the memory Switching on/pausing The selection screen closes after a few with the programmable speed limiter F Turn the thumbwheel to the position moments. or 1 LIMIT to select the speed limiter; the function is This setting becomes the new limit speed. Use the speed suggested by the Speed paused. Limit recognition and recommendation. F If the speed setting is suitable (last speed To modify the limit speed setting from the 6. Display and adjustment of the programmed speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit inter-vehicle distance. setting programmed in the system), press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on. recognition and recommendation: F the speed suggested is displayed in the F Pressing button 4 again temporarily For more information on Memorising speeds instrument panel, interrupts the function (pause). or on the Speed Limit recognition and F make a first press on button 5; a message recommendation, refer to the corresponding is displayed to confirm the memorisation sections. Adjusting the limit speed request, F press button 5 again to save the suggested Displays in the instrument panel setting speed. The speed displays immediately in the You do not have to switch the speed limiter on instrument panel as the new speed setting. in order to set the speed. To modify the limit speed setting from the Temporarily exceeding the current speed of the vehicle: speed setting F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make F If you want to temporarily exceed the successive short presses on button 2 or 3, programmed limit speed, press firmly on the F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h), accelerator pedal, going beyond the point of press and hold button 2 or 3. resistance.

6. Speed limiter On/Off indication. 7. Speed limiter mode selected.

134 Driving

The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the speed Speed regulation remains active after the displayed programmed speed flashes. limiter. changing gear on vehicles fitted with a Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a manual gearbox and Stop & Start. the programmed speed. qualified workshop. On a steep descent or in the event of The use of mats not approved by sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will The operation of the cruise control can be PEUGEOT may interfere with the not be able to prevent the vehicle from interrupted (pause): operation of the speed limiter. exceeding the programmed speed. - by pressing control or by pressing the To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: 4 brake pedal, - ensure that the mat is positioned You may have to brake to control the speed of - automatically, if operation of the dynamic correctly, your vehicle. stability control system is triggered. - never fit one mat on top of another. When the speed limit is exceeded but this is not due to action by the driver, an audible signal Switching off the ignition cancels any supplements the alert. programmed speed setting.

Once the vehicle slows down to the required Cruise control The cruise control system is a driving aid setting, the speed limiter is active again: the that cannot, in any circumstances, replace speed setting display is fixed once more. The system automatically maintains the need to observe speed limits, nor the the vehicle’s cruising speed at a need for vigilance on the part of the driver. setting programmed by the driver, Switching off As a safety measure, you are advised to without using the accelerator pedal. 6 keep your feet near the pedals at all times. F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position: the display of information on the speed The cruise control is switched on manually. limiter disappears. It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h). Steering mounted control Malfunction With a manual gearbox, it requires the engagement of third gear or higher. With an automatic gearbox, it requires the engagement of the selector in mode D or of second or higher gear in mode M.

135 Driving

1. Select cruise control mode. 6. Cruise control pause/resume indication. F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h), 2. Use the current speed as the speed 7. Cruise control selection indication. press and hold button 2 or 3. setting/decrease the speed setting. 8. Value of the speed setting. 3. Use the current speed as the speed 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit Take care: pressing and holding button 2 setting/increase the speed setting. recognition and recommendation system or 3 results in a rapid change in the speed 4. Pause/Resume cruise control. (depending on version). of your vehicle. 5. Depending on version: Display of speed thresholds in the memory Switching on/pausing with the programmable cruise control F As a precaution, it is recommended or Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the CRUISE that the cruise speed chosen be close Use the speed suggested by the Speed position to select cruise control mode; the to the current speed of your vehicle, so Limit recognition and recommendation. function is paused. as to avoid any sudden acceleration or F To start the cruise control and set a cruise For more information on Memorising speeds deceleration of the vehicle. or on the Speed Limit recognition and speed, once the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press button 2 or 3: the recommendation, refer to the corresponding To modify the cruise speed setting using current speed of your vehicle becomes the sections. memorised speed settings and from the touch cruise speed setting. screen: You can release the accelerator pedal. F press button 5 to display the memorised F Pressing button 4 interrupts operation of the speed settings, system (pause). F press the button for the desired speed F Pressing button 4 again restores operation setting. Displays in the instrument panel of the cruise control (ON). The selection screen closes after a few moments. Modifying the cruise speed This setting becomes the new cruise speed. setting To modify the cruise speed setting from the The cruise control must be active. speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit recognition and recommendation: To modify the cruise speed setting from the F the speed suggested is displayed in the current speed of the vehicle: instrument panel, F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make F make an initial press on button 5; a successive short presses on button 2 or 3, message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request.

136 Driving

F press button 5 again to save the suggested Switching off When cruise control is active, be careful speed. when holding one of the speed setting The speed displays immediately in the F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position: buttons: this may result in a very rapid instrument panel as the new speed setting. the cruise control information disappears change in the speed of your vehicle. from the screen. Do not use the cruise control on slippery Temporarily exceeding the roads or in heavy traffic. programmed speed When descending a steep hill, the cruise Malfunction control system cannot prevent the vehicle If needed (for overtaking, etc.) it is possible to from exceeding the programmed speed. exceed the programmed speed by pressing the On steep climbs or when towing, the accelerator pedal. programmed speed may not be reached The cruise control is temporarily overridden or maintained. and the programmed speed setting flashes. The use of mats not approved by To return to the programmed speed, simply Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the PEUGEOT may interfere with the release the accelerator pedal. cruise control. operation of the cruise control. Once the vehicle has returned to the Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: programmed speed, the cruise control takes qualified workshop. - ensure that the mat is positioned over again: the display of the programmed correctly, speed setting becomes fixed again. - never fit one mat on top of another. 6 When descending a steep hill, the cruise control system cannot prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. You may have to brake to control the speed of your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is automatically paused. To activate the system again, with the speed of the vehicle above 25 mph (40 km/h), press button 4.

137 Driving

Adaptive cruise control Principle of operation This system is a driving aid that cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to The system automatically adapts the speed of observe speed limits and safety distances, your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to This system provides the following nor the need for vigilance on the part of maintain a constant distance. functions: the driver. If the vehicle in front is driving more slowly, the - Automatically maintains the vehicle Some vehicles present on the road may system slows, or even stops your vehicle (with at the speed set by the driver. not be properly seen or may be poorly the EAT8 automatic gearbox or the BlueHDi - Automatic adjustment of the interpreted by the camera and/or radar 150 S&S EAT6 engine), using engine braking distance between your vehicle and (e.g. a lorry), which may lead to a poor and the braking system. the one in front. assessment of the distances and lead to If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes the vehicle inappropriately accelerating or With the EAT8 automatic gearbox or with the lane, the cruise control progressively braking. BlueHDi 150 S&S EAT6 engine, automatic accelerates your vehicle to return to the The driver must be ready at all times adjustment can cause your vehicle to come to a programmed speed. to retake control of their vehicle by complete stop. If the driver operates a direction indicator to permanently holding both hands on the overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise control It manages the acceleration and deceleration steering wheel and keeping their feet near allows your vehicle to temporarily approach of the vehicle by automatically acting on the the brake and accelerator pedals. the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking engine and the braking system. manoeuvre, though never exceeding the programmed speed. Steering mounted control

The brake lamps illuminate as soon as the braking system is activated with To do so, it has a radar located in the front deceleration of the vehicle. bumper.

Primarily designed for driving on main roads and motorways, this system only works on moving vehicles, driving in the same direction as your vehicle. 1. Select cruise control mode.

138 Driving

2. Use the current speed as the speed 9. Value of the speed setting. F Vehicle moving, press one of the buttons setting/decrease the speed setting. 10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary 2 or 3: the current speed of your vehicle 3. Use the current speed as the speed (with EAT8 automatic gearbox). becomes the cruise speed setting. setting/increase the speed setting. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit 11. Remembering the settings 4. Pause/Resume cruise control. recognition and recommendation. Switching off the ignition cancels any speed 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed setting value chosen by the driver. As soon as a vehicle is detected, the symbol Limit recognition and recommendation. By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set 7 is filled with the colour associated with the 6. Display and adjustment of the programmed at "Normal" (2 dashes). Otherwise, the last cruise control mode. By default, the symbol 7 inter-vehicle distance. setting made will be used when switching on is empty. the system. For more information on the Speed Limit When the cruise control is in operation, the recognition and recommendation, refer to symbols 7 and 8 are displayed in green. By the corresponding section. default, they are displayed in grey. Pause The cruise control can be paused manually by: - action by the driver: • On the button 4 (Pause). • On the brake pedal. Displays in the instrument panel • On the electric parking brake control. • On the clutch pedal, by pressing and holding for more than 5 seconds. 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting. • When changing from mode D to N with an Position of vehicle detected by the radar. 6 13. automatic gearbox. - or automatically: Switching on • If the ESC system is activated, for safety reasons. To switch on the cruise control • When the speed of the vehicle exceeds F With the engine running, turn the wheel 1 19 mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox. to the "CRUISE" position. The system is paused (grey display).

7. Indication of the presence/absence of a With an automatic gearbox target vehicle. Mode D or M must be selected. 8. Indication of cruise control activation/ With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and deactivation. 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h):

139 Driving

For more information on the Speed Limit When the cruise control is paused, it Modification of the speed recognition and recommendation, refer to can only be reactivated when all of the setting the corresponding section. safety conditions are met. The "Activation With the engine running and cruise control on denied, conditions unsuitable" message is (green), you can modify the speed setting. displayed if reactivation is not possible. As a precaution, it is recommended that you select a cruise speed close to Modification from the current the current speed of your vehicle, so speed as to avoid any sudden acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. Reactivating the function F By successive short presses on button 2 or 3, to lower or raise the setting in steps of With a manual gearbox 1 mph (km/h), To reactivate the function, the driver must F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3, to Modification of the programmed accelerate to reach at least 19 mph (30 km/h), lower or raise the setting in steps of 5 mph then press one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. inter-vehicle distance (km/h). With the EAT8 gearbox or with the BlueHDi 150 S&S EAT6 engine Take care: pressing and holding button 2 Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to or 3 results in a rapid change in the speed a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle of your vehicle. stationary; the cruise control is paused. Three threshold settings are suggested for the The driver should press the accelerator pedal inter-vehicle distance: to move off, then reactivate the system above Modification from the speed Limit - "Distant" (3 dashes), 19 mph (30 km/h) by pressing button 2, 3 or 4. recognition and recommendation - "Normal" (2 dashes), If the driver takes no action following this system - "Close" (1 dash). immobilisation, the electric parking brake is F The suggested speed is displayed in the Engine running and with the wheel at the applied automatically after a while (approx. five instrument panel. "CRUISE" position: minutes). F Make an initial press on button 5; a F Press button 6 to display the selection message is displayed to confirm the screen for inter-vehicle distance. memorisation request. F By pressing button 6 repeatedly, cycle As a safety measure, wait until the current F Press button 5 again to save the suggested through the predefined settings. speed approaches the speed setting to speed. The selection screen closes after a few reactivate the function by pressing button 4. The speed displays immediately in the seconds. instrument panel as the new speed setting. The change then takes effect.

140 Driving

This setting remains in memory, whatever the state of the system and when the ignition is switched off.

The selection also applies to the stopping distance (with EAT6 and EAT8 automatic gearbox).

Exceeding the programmed setting It is possible to exceed the speed setting temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal. The cruise control no longer manages the braking system during this period. Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed. If the programmed speed setting is exceeded, the display of the speed setting disappears and a message "Cruise control suspended" 6 is displayed until the accelerator pedal is released. Driving situations and associated alerts The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed depending on the driving situation. The display of these alerts is not sequential. The instrument panel "Driving aids" display screen tab must have been selected first.

141 Driving

Warning/Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments

"Cruise control paused" System paused. No vehicle detected. (grey) "Cruise control paused" System paused. A vehicle has been detected. (grey)

"Cruise control on" System activated. No vehicle detected.

(green) according to the inter-vehicle distance selected

"Cruise control on" System activated. A vehicle has been detected.

(green) according to the inter-vehicle distance selected

"Cruise control suspended" System activated. The driver has temporarily taken control of the vehicle by accelerating. or

(green)

142 Driving

Warning/Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments

"Take back control of the vehicle" The driver must take back control of the vehicle + by accelerating or braking, depending on the circumstances. (green) (orange)

"Take back control of the vehicle" The system cannot manage the critical situation + alone (emergency braking of the target vehicle, rapid insertion of another vehicle between the two vehicles). (green) (red) The driver must immediately take back control of the vehicle.

"Activation denied, conditions The system refuses to activate the cruise control 70 unsuitable" (speed outside the operating range, winding road).

or (orange) 70 (grey) 6 With the EAT8 automatic gearbox and with BlueHDi 150 S&S EAT6

Warning/Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments

"Cruise control paused" The system has brought the vehicle to a complete (for a few seconds) stop and is holding it immobilised. The driver must accelerate to move off again. The cruise control remains paused until the driver or according to the inter-vehicle reactivates it. distance selected and the actual distance from the target vehicle (grey)/(green) 143 Driving

Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to When the driver must suspend the cruise The system must not be activated in the a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle control system: following situations: stationary; the cruise control is paused. - When the "space-saver" spare wheel is The driver should press the accelerator pedal being used (depending on version). to move off, then reactivate the system by - When towing. pressing button 2, 3 or 4. If the driver takes no - Following an impact on the front bumper. action following this immobilisation, the electric parking brake is applied automatically after a Be particularly careful: while (approx. five minutes). - When motorcycles are present and - Vehicles in a tight bend. when there are vehicles staggered Operating limits - When approaching a roundabout. onto the traffic lane. - When you enter a tunnel or cross a The system cannot exceed the limits of the bridge. laws of physics. The system cannot deal with certain situations and the driver has to take back control of the vehicle. - When following a narrow vehicle. Cases of non-detection by the radar: Reactivate cruise control when conditions - Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. permit. - Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, etc.). Cases where the driver is urged to take back control immediately: - Excessively sharp deceleration of the vehicle in front of you.

- Vehicles crossing your lane. - Oncoming vehicles.

- When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your vehicle and the one in front.

144 Driving

The cruise control operates by day and The system is not intended for the Malfunction night, in fog or moderate rainfall. following situations: However, it is strongly recommended that - the front end of the vehicle has been If the cruise control you always keep a safe distance from modified (addition of long-range malfunctions, dashes are vehicles ahead, according to the driving headlamps, painting of the front displayed instead of the conditions, the weather and the road bumper), cruise control speed setting. surface. - driving on a racing track, Use the cruise control only where the - driving on a rolling road, If this warning lamp comes driving conditions allow running at a - use of snow chains, non-slip covers or on, accompanied by an alert constant speed and keeping an adequate studded tyres. message and an audible safety distance. The use of mats not approved by signal, this confirms a Do not activate the cruise control in urban PEUGEOT may interfere with the malfunction. areas where pedestrians are likely to operation of the cruise control. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT cross the road, in heavy traffic (except for To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: dealer or a qualified workshop. versions with EAT8 gearbox), on winding - ensure that the mat is secured or steep roads, on slippery or flooded correctly, The adaptive cruise control deactivates roads, when there is snowfall, if the front - never fit one mat on top of another. automatically if the use of a "space-saver" bumper is damaged or when the brake type spare wheel is detected or if there is lamps have failed. The following situations may interfere with a malfunction on the lateral brake lamps or In certain circumstances, it may not the operation of the system or prevent it trailer brake lamps (for approved trailers). 6 be possible for the speed setting to be from working: maintained or even reached: loaded - poor visibility (inadequate street vehicle, ascending a steep hill, etc. lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense fog, etc.), - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light, etc.), - camera or radar masked (mud, frost, snow, condensation, etc.). In these situations, detection performance may be reduced.

145 Driving

The vehicle has a camera located at the top of All passenger seat belts must be fastened. Active Safety Brake the windscreen, and a radar located in the front Driving at a steady speed on roads with few with Distance Alert and bumper. bends is required. Intelligent emergency This system is designed to assist the braking assistance driver and improve road safety. The following situations may interfere with It is the driver's responsibility to the operation of the system or prevent it continuously monitor the state of the from working: traffic, observing the driving regulations. - poor visibility (inadequate street This system does not replace the need for lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense The system allows: vigilance on the part of the driver. fog, etc.), - the driver to be warned that their vehicle is - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming at risk of collision with the vehicle in front, vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp - a collision to be prevented, or its severity to road, leaving a tunnel, alternating be limited, by reducing the vehicle’s speed. As soon as the system detects a potential shade and light, etc.), obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in This system is a driving aid that includes three - camera or radar obstructed (mud, frost, case automatic braking is needed. This functions: snow, condensation, etc.). may cause a slight noise and a slight - Distance Alert (alert if there is a risk of On versions with the camera alone, this sensation of deceleration. collision), message indicates to you that the camera - Intelligent emergency braking assistance, is obstructed: "Driving aids camera: - Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency Deactivation/Activation Visibility limited, see user guide". braking). In these situations, detection performance By default, the system is automatically may be reduced. activated at every engine start. Deactivation of the system is signalled by the illumination of this indicator lamp, accompanied by the display of a message.

Operating conditions and limits The ESC system must not be faulty. The DSC system must not be deactivated. 146 Driving

Clean the windscreen regularly, The system is automatically deactivated Modifying the alert trigger particularly the area in front of the camera. after the use of the "space-saver" type threshold The internal surface of the windscreen can spare wheel is detected, or if a fault with This threshold determines how you wish to be also become misted around the camera. the lateral brake lamps is detected. warned of the presence of a vehicle moving In humid and cold weather, demist the or stationary in front of you, or a pedestrian windscreen regularly. present in your traffic lane. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the It is possible that warnings are not given, bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could You can select one of three predefined are given too late or seem unjustified. conceal the detection camera. thresholds: Consequently, always stay in control of - "Distant", your vehicle and be prepared to react at - "Normal", any time to avoid an accident. - "Close". In the following cases, deactivating the system The last threshold selected is kept in memory via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: when the ignition is switched off. - towing a trailer, - carrying long objects on roof bars or roof After an impact, the function automatically Operation rack, stops operating. Contact a PEUGEOT Depending on the degree of risk of collision - with snow chains fitted, dealer or a qualified workshop to have the detected by the system and the alert threshold - before using an automatic car wash, with system checked. chosen by the driver, different levels of alert can be the engine running, triggered and displayed in the instrument panel. 6 - before placing the vehicle on a rolling road They take account of the vehicle dynamics, in a workshop, Distance Alert the speed of your vehicle and the one in front, - towed vehicle, engine running, the environmental conditions, the operation of - damaged front bumper, It warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of the vehicle (cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to - following impact to the windscreen close to collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian trigger the alert at the best moment. the detection camera. present in their traffic lane.

147 Driving Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, Active Safety Brake - The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph signalling to you that the vehicle in (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is front is very close. detected. The message "Vehicle close" is - The vehicle's speed must be between 6 mph displayed. and 87 mph (10 km/h and 140 km/h) when a moving vehicle is detected. If the camera and/or radar have Level 2 (red): visual and audible confirmed the presence of a vehicle alert, warning you that a collision is or a pedestrian, this warning lamp imminent. flashes once the function is acting The message "Brake!" is displayed. on the vehicle's brakes.

With an automatic gearbox, in the event of Where the speed of your vehicle is too automatic emergency braking until the vehicle high approaching another vehicle, the first comes to a complete stop, keep the brake level of alert may not be displayed: the pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from level 2 alert may be displayed directly. starting off again. Important: alert level 1 is never displayed With a manual gearbox, in the event of for a stationary obstacle or when the This function, also called automatic emergency automatic emergency braking until the vehicle "Close" trigger threshold has been braking, intervenes following the alert if the comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall. selected. driver does not react quickly enough and does not operate the vehicle's brakes. The driver can maintain control of the It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a vehicle at any time by sharply turning frontal collision by your vehicle where the driver the steering wheel and/or pressing the Intelligent emergency fails to react. accelerator pedal. braking assistance Operation If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid Operation of the function may be felt by The system operates under the following a collision, this system will supplement the slight vibration in the brake pedal. conditions: braking, within the limits of the laws of physics. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, - The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph This assistance will only be provided if you the automatic braking is maintained for 1 (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. press the brake pedal. to 2 seconds.

148 Driving Malfunction Driver Attention Warning Driver Attention Alert The system triggers an alert once it In the event of a fault with the system, detects that the driver has not taken Depending on version, the "Driver Attention you are alerted by the continuous a break after two hours of driving at Warning" may be combined with the "Driver illumination of this warning lamp, a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). Attention Alert". accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. This alert is issued via the display of a message encouraging you to take a break, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified accompanied by an audible signal. workshop to have the system checked. If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is Fatigue detection system stopped.

Take a break as soon as you feel tired or at The system resets itself if one of the following least every two hours. conditions is met: - engine running, the vehicle has been These systems cannot in any circumstances stationary for more than 15 minutes, replace the need for vigilance on the part - the ignition has been switched off for a few of the driver who must remain in control minutes, Using a camera placed at the top of the of their decisions. In no case can these - the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their windscreen, the system assesses the systems keep the driver awake or prevent door is open. 6 them from falling asleep at the wheel. driver's level of vigilance by identifying It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if they variations in trajectory compared to the feel tired. lane markings. As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes This system is particularly suited to fast roads Activation/Deactivation into standby. (speed faster than 40 mph (65 km/h)). The system is activated or deactivated via the The driving time is counted again once the When the system interprets the behaviour of vehicle configuration menu. speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or For more information on the menu, refer to the inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it part covering your screen in the "Instruments" triggers the first level of alert. section. The driver is then alerted by the message The state of the system stays in the memory "Take care!", accompanied by an audible when the ignition is switched off. signal. 149 Driving

After three first level alerts, the system triggers Clean the windscreen regularly, Conditions for operation a new alert with the message "Take a break!", particularly the area in front of the camera. accompanied by a more pronounced audible The speed of the vehicle must be between The internal surface of the windscreen can signal. 40 mph and 112 mph (65 km/h and 180 km/h). also become misted around the camera. The driver must hold the steering wheel with both In humid and cold weather, demist the hands. In certain driving conditions (poor road windscreen regularly. The change of trajectory must not be surface or strong winds), the system may Do not allow snow to accumulate on the accompanied by operation of the direction give alerts independent of the driver's bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could indicators. level of vigilance. conceal the detection camera. The ESC system must be activated and fault-free.

The following situations may interfere with the operation of the system or prevent it This system is a driving aid that cannot, working: Active Lane Keeping in any circumstances, replace the - poor visibility (inadequate lighting of driver’s own vigilance. The driver must the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain, Assistance remain in control of the vehicle under all dense fog, etc.), Using a camera located at the top of the circumstances. - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming windscreen to identify lane markings on the The system helps the driver only when vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp ground, the system corrects the trajectory of there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily road, leaving a tunnel, alternating the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects wandering from the lane it is being driven shade and light, etc.), a risk of involuntary crossing of a line. in. It does not manage the safe driving - windscreen area located in front of the This system is particularly useful on motorways distance, the speed of the vehicle or the camera: dirty, misted up, frost-covered, and main roads. brakes. snow-covered, damaged or covered by The driver must hold the steering wheel a sticker, with both hands in a way that allows - lane markings absent, worn, hidden control to be maintained in circumstances (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, where the system is not able to intervene etc.), (if lane markings disappear, for example). - close to the vehicle ahead (lane It is necessary to observe the driving markings not detected), regulations and take a break every two - roads that are narrow, winding, etc. hours.

150 Driving Operation Driving situations and

Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle associated alerts involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings The table below describes the alerts and detected on the ground or a lane limit (e.g. messages displayed depending on the driving grass border), it makes the correction to the situation. trajectory necessary to return the vehicle to its The display of these alerts is not sequential. initial path. The instrument panel display screen "Driving The driver will notice a turning movement of the aids" tab must have been selected first. steering wheel. While the direction indicators are on and for a few seconds after switching them off, the This warning lamp flashes during system considers that any change of trajectory trajectory correction. is voluntary and no correction is triggered during this period. However, with the Blind Spot Detection If the driver wishes to maintain the activated, if the driver starts changing lanes trajectory of the vehicle, they can prevent and another vehicle is detected in the vehicle's the correction by keeping a firm grip on blind spot, the system will correct the trajectory the wheel (during an avoiding manoeuvre, of the vehicle even though the direction for example). indicators are on. The correction is interrupted if the For more information on the Blind Spot 6 direction indicators are operated. Detection, refer to the corresponding section.

If the system detects that the driver is not holding the wheel firmly enough during an automatic correction of trajectory, it interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered to encourage the driver to take back control of the vehicle.

151 Driving

Status of the Indicator Display and/or associated message Comments function lamp OFF System deactivated.

(grey) ON System active, conditions not met: - speed below 40 mph (65 km/h), - no lane marking recognised, - ESC deactivated or operation triggered, - "sporty" driving.

ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the system (for example: detection of a trailer, use of the "space-saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle).

Status of the Indicator Display and/or associated message Comments function lamp ON Detection of lane markings. Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). (green)

ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of involuntary crossing is detected (orange line). (orange)/(green)

ON - If, during correction, the system detects that the driver has not held the wheel for a few seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns "Take control of the vehicle". control to the driver. - During correction of the trajectory, if the system determines that the correction will not be enough and that a solid line is crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must complete the correction of the trajectory. 152 Driving

The system is not intended for driving in the Operating limits The following situations may interfere with following situations: the operation of the system or prevent it The system goes into standby automatically in - driving on a speed circuit, working: the following cases: - driving with a trailer, - conditions of poor visibility (inadequate - ESC deactivated or operation triggered, - driving on a rolling road, street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog), - speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater - driving on unstable surfaces. - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming than 112 mph (180 km/h), vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp - connected electrically to a trailer, road, leaving a tunnel, alternating Deactivation/Activation - use of the "space-saver" spare shade and light), wheel detected (as detection is not - windscreen area located in front of the Without touch screen immediate, deactivation of the system is camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, recommended), snow-covered, damaged or covered by - dynamic driving style detected, pressure on a sticker, the brake or accelerator pedal, - lane markings worn, hidden (snow, - driving beyond lane markings, mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.), - activation of the direction indicators, - running close to the vehicle in front - crossing the inside line on a bend, (the lane markings may not be - driving in a tight corner, detected), - inactivity by the driver detected during - roads that are narrow, winding, etc. correction. F Press and hold this button to deactivate the system at any time. 6 Deactivation is signalled by the illumination of the indicator lamp in the button and of this warning lamp in the instrument panel. Risk of undesirable operation Reactivation is achieved by a short press. Deactivation of the system is recommended in the following situations: With touch screen - driving on a road surface in poor condition, - unfavourable climatic conditions, Activation and deactivation of the - driving on slippery surfaces (ice). system is done in the Vehicle/Driving menu of the touch screen.

Select the "Driving functions" tab, then "Lane assist". 153 Driving Malfunction Operation The function is activated and deactivated in the Vehicle/Driving menu, then the Driving functions tab of the touch screen. In the event of a fault with the system, you are The state of the system stays in memory when alerted by the illumination of these warning switching off the ignition. lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A fixed warning lamp appears in the door mirror The system is automatically deactivated on the side in question: when towing with a towing device Blind Spot Detection - immediately, when being overtaken, approved by PEUGEOT. - after a delay of about one second, when overtaking a vehicle slowly. Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers monitor the blind spots. The alert is given by a warning lamp which This system is designed to improve safety comes on in the door mirror on the side in when driving and is in no circumstances question as soon as a vehicle – car, lorry, a substitute for the use of the interior bicycle – is detected and the following rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is conditions are fulfilled: the driver's responsibility to constantly - all the vehicles are moving in the same check the traffic, to assess the distances direction and on adjacent lanes, and relative speeds of other vehicles - the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and This driving assistance system warns the driver and to anticipate their movements before 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h), of the presence of another vehicle in the blind deciding whether to change lane. - you overtake a vehicle with a speed spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from The Blind Spot Detection system does not difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h), the driver's field of vision), as soon as this avoid the need for vigilance on the part of - when a vehicle overtakes you with a speed presents a potential danger. the driver. difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), - the traffic is flowing normally,

154 Driving

- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified if this is prolonged and the vehicle being workshop. overtaken remains in the blind spot, - you are driving on a straight or slightly The system may suffer temporary curved road, interference in certain weather conditions - your vehicle is not pulling a trailer or another (rain, hail, etc.). vehicle. In particular, driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle). In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or - when overtaking or being overtaken by a snow. very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which Take care not to cover the warning zone in is both detected in the rear blind spot and the door mirrors or the detection zones on present in the driver’s front field of vision, the front and rear bumpers with adhesive - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in labels or other objects; they may hamper front and behind are confused with a lorry or the correct operation of the system. 6 a stationary object, - when overtaking quickly.

No alert will be given in the following situations: - in the presence of non-moving objects (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.), High pressure jet wash - with vehicles moving in the opposite Operating fault When washing your vehicle, keep the direction, lance at least 12 inches (30 cm) away from the sensors. - driving on a winding road or a sharp corner, In the event of a fault, this warning lamp comes on. The alert is accompanied by a message and an audible signal. 155 Driving Active Blind Spot of sensors located in the bumper. centimetres, the sound signal becomes Certain types of obstacle (examples: post, continuous. Monitoring System roadworks cone) detected initially will no longer The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door be detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if locates the obstacle in relation to the vehicle, in mirror on the side in question, a correction of they are located in blind spots in the sensors' front or behind. trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking field of detection. with the direction indicators on, to help you avoid a collision. Visual assistance This system cannot in any circumstances replace Conditions for operation the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The following systems must be activated: - Blind Spot Detection, Rear parking sensors - Active Lane Keeping Assistance. The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 The system is switched on by engaging reverse and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) inclusive. gear. This is confirmed by an audible signal. This supplements the audible signal by displaying The system is switched off when you come out bars on the screen that move progressively of reverse gear. Parking sensors nearer to the vehicle. When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" symbol is displayed.

Audible assistance Front parking sensors In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected or when the speed of the vehicle The proximity information is given by an exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). This system indicates the proximity of an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which obstacle (examples: pedestrian, vehicle, tree, increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. gate) which comes within the field of detection When the distance between the vehicle and 156 the obstacle becomes less than about thirty Driving

The sound emitted by the speaker (front or Operating limits Maintenance rear) locates the obstacle in relation to the - Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ recommendations vehicle, in front or behind. blind spots may not be detected or no longer be detected during the manoeuvre. In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the - Sounds such as those emitted by noisy sensors are not covered with mud, ice or Deactivation/activation of vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an pneumatic drills, etc.) may interfere with the audible signal (long beep) indicates that the front and rear parking vehicle's sensors. the sensors may be dirty. sensors - Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound The system is deactivated in the waves: pedestrians may not be detected. Vehicle/Driving menu, then the - Accumulated snow or dead leaves on the road surface can interfere with the vehicle's Driving functions tab of the touch High pressure jet wash sensors. screen. When washing your vehicle, keep the - A front or rear impact to the vehicle can lance at least 12 inches (30 cm) away from distort the settings of the sensors, which is the sensors. F Press this button. The indicator not always detected by the system: distance lamp in the button comes on. measurements may be incorrect. - The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is Pressing this button again reactivates the function. very loaded can affect the distance The indicator lamp in the button goes off. measurements. Operating fault 6 - The sensors may be affected by poor On engaging reverse gear: The function will be automatically weather conditions (heavy rain, thick fog, deactivated when connecting a trailer or a snowfall, etc.). This warning lamp comes on in the bicycle carrier on a towing device installed instrument panel and/or a message in accordance with the manufacturer's appears, accompanied by an audible recommendations. signal.

The parking sensors are deactivated while the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Park Assist system is measuring a space. workshop. For more information on Park Assist, refer to the corresponding section.

157 Driving

Reversing camera They are represented as lines marked Visiopark 1 "on the ground" and do not indicate the position of tall obstacles (for example: other vehicles, etc.) relative to the vehicle. Some distortion of the image is normal. It is normal to have a part of the number plate showing in the bottom of the screen.

The blue lines 1 represent the general direction With the engine running, and as soon as of the vehicle (the gap represents the width of reverse gear is engaged, this system allows your vehicle except for the door mirrors). views of your vehicle’s close surroundings to The red line 2 represents a distance of about be displayed on the touch screen using a rear The reversing camera is activated automatically 30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear camera. when reverse gear is engaged. bumper. The image is displayed on the touch screen. The green lines 3 represent distances of about 1 m and 2 m beyond the edge of your vehicle's The reversing camera cannot, in any rear bumper. circumstances, replace the need for The turquoise blue curves 4 represent the vigilance on the part of the driver. maximum turning circle.

Opening the tailgate causes the display to disappear.

Clean the reversing camera regularly using a soft, dry cloth. The screen is divided into two parts: on the left, a contextual view; on the right, a view from The representation with overlaid lines helps above the vehicle in its close surroundings. High pressure jet washing with the manoeuvre. When washing your vehicle, do not direct The parking sensors supplement the the lance closer than 30 cm to the lens of information on the view from above the vehicle. the camera.

158 Driving

Different contextual views can be displayed in Principle of operation The images provided by the camera may the left-hand part: be distorted by the relief. - standard view, In the presence of areas in shade, or in - 180° view, conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate - zoom view. lighting, the image may be darkened and with lower contrast.

Activation

Activation is automatic on engaging reverse at Using the rear camera, the vehicle's a speed lower than 6 mph (10 km/h). surroundings are recorded during manoeuvres at low speed. An image from above your vehicle in its close surroundings is created in real time, as the The blue lines 1 represent the width of your vehicle manoeuvre progresses. vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their This representation facilitates the alignment of direction changes depending on the position of your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles the steering wheel. close to the vehicle to be seen. The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm This image is automatically deleted if the 6 from the bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 vehicle remains stationary for too long. represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.

AUTO mode is activated by default. You can choose the display mode at any time In this mode, the system chooses the best view by pressing on this area. to display (standard or zoom) according to the This system is a visual aid that cannot in information from the parking sensors. any circumstances replace the need for When the sub-menu is displayed, select one of You can change the type of view at any time vigilance on the part of the driver. the four views: during a manoeuvre. "Standard view".

The state of the system is not kept in memory when the ignition is switched off. "180° view".

159 Driving "Zoom view". AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; the direction "AUTO mode". changes depending on the position of the steering wheel. The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and The function will be deactivated: 4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. - If a trailer is attached or a bicycle This view is available with AUTO mode or in the carrier is fitted on a towbar (vehicle view selection menu. fitted with a towbar installed in line with the manufacturer's recommendations). - Above about 6 mph (10 km/h). - On opening the tailgate. This mode is activated by default. Zoom view - When shifting out of reverse (the image Using sensors in the rear bumper, the remains displayed for 7 seconds). automatic view changes from a rear view - By pressing the red cross in the top (standard) to a view from above (zoom), as an left-hand corner of the touch screen. obstacle is approached at the level of the red line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre.

Standard view Check the cleanliness of the camera lens regularly. Clean the reversing camera regularly using a soft, dry cloth. The camera records the vehicle's surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to create a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the screen. 160 Driving

It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and During phases of entry into and exit from a Obstacles may appear further away than right C. parking space, the system provides visual they actually are in reality. This view is available only from the view and audible information to the driver in order It is important to check the sides of the selection menu. to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the necessary to move forwards and backwards mirrors. more than once. The rear parking sensors also provide Recommendations on care information on the vehicle's surroundings. In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the The driver can take control at any time by sensors and camera are not covered with mud, gripping the steering wheel. ice or snow. 180° view Check the cleanliness of the camera lens This manoeuvring assistance system regularly. cannot, in any circumstances, replace the If necessary, clean the camera with a soft, dry need for vigilance on the part of the driver. cloth. The driver must remain in control of their When washing your vehicle at high pressure, vehicle ensuring that the space remains direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the clear throughout the manoeuvre. camera and parking sensors. In some circumstances, the sensors may not detect small obstacles located in their blind spots. Park Assist 6 This system provides active assistance with parking: it detects a parking space then The Park Assist system cannot work with operates the steering system to park in this the engine off. space. With a manual gearbox, the driver manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch. With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a driver manages the accelerator, brakes and parking bay, making it possible to see the gears. approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre.

161 Driving

The Park Assist system takes control The parking sensors function is of the assistance for a maximum of not available during parking space 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is measurement. It intervenes later when deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle think that your vehicle is not positioned is approaching an obstacle: the audible correctly, you should then take control of signal becomes continuous when the the steering to carry out the manoeuvre. obstacle is less than thirty centimetres away. The Park Assist system provides assistance for If you have deactivated the parking the following manoeuvres: sensors, they are automatically A. Parallel parking. The sequence of manoeuvres and the reactivated during assisted parking B. Exit from a parallel parking space. driving instructions are displayed on the manoeuvres. touch screen. C. Bay parking. The assistance is activated: the display of this symbol and During manoeuvring phases, the steering Activation of Park Assist deactivates the a speed limit indicate that wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold Blind Spot Detection. the steering wheel, do not put your hands the steering manoeuvres are between the spokes of the steering wheel. controlled by the system: do not Watch out for any object that could block touch the steering wheel. Operation the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarves, ties, etc.) - injury risk! Assistance with parallel parking The assistance is deactivated: manoeuvres the display of this symbol indicates that the steering When you have identified a parking space: When the Park Assist is active, it prevents manoeuvres are no longer the Stop & Start going into STOP mode. controlled by the system: you F Select "Park Assist" in the In STOP mode, activating Park Assist must take control of the steering. Vehicle/Driving menu, then restarts the engine. the Driving functions tab of the touch screen to activate the function. You should always check the surroundings of your vehicle before starting a manoeuvre.

162 Driving

F Limit the speed of the vehicle to F Drive slowly following the instructions until F Select reverse, release the steering wheel a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) the system finds a free space. and start moving without exceeding 4 mph and select "Enter parking slot" (7 km/h). in the touch screen.

To enter a parking space, the system does not identify spaces that are clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle. 6

F Move forwards slowly until a message is F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in displayed, accompanied by an audible progress. signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move forwards and backwards, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" F Operate the direction indicator on the system, until the end of the manoeuvre is parking side chosen to activate the indicated. measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles. 163 Driving

F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator F Operate the direction indicator for the exit The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's lamp in the instrument panel goes off, side chosen. front wheels are clear of the parking space. accompanied by a message and an audible F Engage reverse or forward gear and release At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp signal. the steering wheel. in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied The assistance is deactivated: you can take by a message and an audible signal. over control. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.

Assistance in exiting from a parallel parking space Assistance with bay parking manoeuvres F When you want to leave a parallel parking space, start the engine. F Once you have identified a F When the vehicle is stopped, parking space, select "Park select "Park Assist" in the Assist" in the Vehicle/Driving F Vehicle/Driving menu, then The assisted parking manoeuvre is in menu, then the Driving the Driving functions tab of progress. Without exceeding 3 mph functions tab of the touch screen the touch screen to activate the (5 km/h), move forwards and backwards, to activate the function. function. aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the F F Press "Exit parking slot" in the end of the manoeuvre. Limit the speed of the vehicle to touch screen. a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Start parking in a bay" in the touch screen. 164 Driving

F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible progress. measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the instructions displayed in the instrument the row of parked vehicles. panel, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the end of the manoeuvre is indicated. 6

F Select reverse, release the steering wheel F Drive slowly following the instructions until and start moving without exceeding 4 mph the system finds a free space. (7 km/h). At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied When several successive bays are found, by a message and an audible signal. the vehicle will be directed towards the The assistance is deactivated: you can take last one. over control.

165 Driving

- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the In the event of a fault with the During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park stated limit, power steering, this warning lamp Assist system is automatically deactivated - when the driver interrupts movement of the comes on in the instrument panel, once the rear of the vehicle is within 20 steering wheel, accompanied by a message. inches (50 cm) of an obstacle. - after 4 manoeuvre cycles, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified - on opening the driver's door, workshop. - if one of the front wheels encounters an obstacle. If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the During parking and exit from parking This symbol is displayed on the touch space is too great, the system may not be able to manoeuvres, the Reversing Camera screen and a message appears, measure the space. function may come into operation. It accompanied by an audible signal. Anything projecting beyond the dimensions of the facilitates monitoring of the surroundings vehicle (long or wide load) is not taken into account The driver should then take back control of the of the vehicle, by displaying additional by the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre. information in the instrument panel. vehicle's steering. For more information on the Reversing If the system is deactivated during a Camera, refer to the corresponding manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate it to In bad weather or in winter, ensure that section. repeat the measurement. the sensors are not covered by road dirt, ice or snow. Deactivation In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Deactivation The system is switched off automatically: - when towing a trailer, qualified workshop. The system is deactivated by pressing the - if the driver's door is opened, control. - if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph The system is deactivated automatically: (70 km/h). - on switching off the ignition, To switch the system off for a prolonged period, Tyre under-inflation - if the engine stalls, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified detection - if no manoeuvre is performed within workshop. This system automatically monitors the tyre 5 minutes of selecting the type of Operating faults manoeuvre pressure while driving. - after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during Depending on version: The system monitors the pressure in all four a manoeuvre, This warning lamp comes on in the tyres, once the vehicle is moving. - if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is instrument panel and a message appears, triggered, accompanied by an audible signal. 166 Driving

It compares the information given by the The tyre pressure specifications for your The loss of pressure detected does not wheel speed sensors with reference values, vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure always cause visible bulging of the tyre. which must be reinitialised after every tyre label. Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual pressure adjustment or wheel change. For more information on the check. The system triggers an alert as soon as it Identification markings, refer to the detects a drop in the pressure of one or more corresponding section. tyres. F In the event of a puncture, use the Tyre pressures should be checked when temporary puncture repair kit or the spare the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for wheel (depending on equipment), 1 hour or after a journey of less than or 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speeds). F if you have a compressor, such as the one The tyre under-inflation detection system Otherwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to the in the temporary puncture repair kit, check does not replace the need for vigilance on pressures shown on the label. the pressures of the four tyres when cold, the part of the driver. or This system still requires you to check F if it is not possible to carry out this check the tyre inflation pressures (including immediately, drive carefully at reduced the spare wheel) every month as well as speed. before a long journey. Snow chains Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs The system does not have to be handling, extends braking distances and reinitialised after fitting or removing snow causes early tyre wear, particularly in The alert is kept active until the system is chains. reinitialised. 6 adverse conditions (heavy loads, high speeds, long journeys). Under-inflation alert Reinitialisation This warning is indicated by fixed The system must be reinitialised after any illumination of this warning lamp, an adjustment to the pressure of one or more Driving with under-inflated tyres audible signal and, depending on tyres, and after changing one or more wheels. increases fuel consumption. the equipment installed, a message displayed on the screen. F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking. F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

167 Driving

F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the by illumination of the Service warning lamp Driving assistance menu, then the Tyre indicates a fault with the system. pressures menu, then the Reinitialisation A message appears, accompanied by an menu, then confirm by pressing the OK audible signal. Before reinitialising the system, ensure button. that the pressures of the four tyres Reinitialisation is confirmed by an audible In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the are correct for the conditions of use signal. tyres is no longer assured. of the vehicle and conform to the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT recommendations on the tyre pressure Touch screen dealer or a qualified workshop. label. Reinitialisation of the system is done with the The under-inflation alert can only be relied ignition on and the vehicle stationary. on if the reinitialisation of the system has Before doing anything to the system, been done with the pressures in the four F Select "​Under-inflation the pressures of the four tyres must be tyres correctly adjusted. initialisation" in the Vehicle/ checked and the system reinitialised. The under-inflation detection system Driving menu, then the Driving does not give a warning if a pressure is functions tab of the touch screen. incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.

F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes", Screen C an audible signal and a message confirm the reinitialisation.

The new pressure parameters saved are treated as reference values by the system. F Press the MENU button for access to the main menu. F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, Malfunction then confirm by pressing the OK button. F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the Define the vehicle parameters menu, then confirm by pressing the OK button. The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied 168 PEUGEOT & TOTAL A PARTNERSHIP FOR PERFORMANCE!

The PEUGEOT TOTAL team knows how to push back the limits of performance to win victories in the most difficult conditions, as confirmed by the first three places achieved in 2017. To obtain these exceptional results, the PEUGEOT Sport teams chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the PEUGEOT 3008 DKR, a high-tech lubricant that protects the engine in the most severe conditions.

TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time.

TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant, the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL R&D. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean. Practical information Fuel tank F Fill the tank. Do not continue past the third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may Tank capacity: about 53 litres (or 45 litres cause malfunctions. depending on the version). F Refit the filler cap turning it to the right. F Push the filler flap to close it (your vehicle Opening must be unlocked). Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases. F Take care to select the pump that delivers For petrol engines, you must use unleaded the correct fuel type for your vehicle's fuel. engine (see a reminder label on the inside The filler neck is narrower, admitting petrol of the filler flap). nozzles only. F Introduce the key into the filler cap, if your vehicle has a normal key. F Turn the filler cap to the left.

If you have put in the wrong fuel for F If your vehicle has K​ eyless Entry and your vehicle, you must have the tank Starting, unlock the vehicle. drained and refilled with the correct F Press the filler flap (on the rear side of the fuel before you start the engine. vehicle) then pull it.

For the Puretech 225 S&S EAT8 engine, the Refilling use of RON98 lead-free petrol is recommended to guarantee optimum operation of the engine. At least 6 litres of fuel must be added, in order to be registered by the fuel gauge. F Remove the filler cap and hang it on its Opening the filler cap may create a noise carrier (on the filler flap). Low fuel level caused by an inrush of air. This is entirely F Introduce the nozzle and push it in fully normal and results from the sealing of the fuel (pushing on the metal non-return valve A). When the low fuel level in the tank is system. reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message.

170 Practical information

When it first comes on, less than 6 litres of fuel Driving abroad remain in the tank. As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid different in other countries, the presence running out of fuel. of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with Fuel cut-off misfuel protection, so before travelling Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that abroad, we recommend that you check cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an with the PEUGEOT dealer network, impact. whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, intend to travel. Diesel tank, it comes into contact with the flap. never refuel with the engine in STOP The system remains closed and prevents filling. mode; you must switch off the ignition. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type filler nozzle.

Diesel misfuel prevention It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank slowly. Mechanical device which prevents filling the In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in avoid the risk of engine damage that can result direct contact with the flap of the misfuel from filling with the wrong fuel. prevention device. 7 Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.

171 Practical information Compatibility of fuels

Fuel used for petrol engines Diesel fuel that meets standard The only Diesel additives authorised for EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets use are those that meet the B715000 The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels standard EN14214 (possibly containing standard. that conform to current and future European up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester), standards and which can be obtained from Diesel at low temperature filling stations: Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets At temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the Petrol that meets standard EN228, standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel mixed with a biofuel that meets standard that meets standard EN14214 (possibly fuels could result in an abnormal operation EN15376. containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl of the fuel supply circuit. To avoid this, we Ester). recommend using winter-type Diesel fuel and B20 or B30 fuel that meets the standard keeping the fuel tank more than 50% full. The only petrol additives authorised for EN16709 can be used with your Diesel If, despite this, at temperatures below -15°C use are those that meet the B715001 engine. However, the use of this (+5°F) the engine has problems starting, standard. fuel, even occasional, requires strict just leave the vehicle in a garage or heated application of the special servicing workshop for a little while. conditions referred to as "Arduous Fuel used for Diesel conditions". engines Travelling abroad The Diesel engines are compatible with For more information, contact a PEUGEOT Certain fuels could damage the engine of biofuels that conform to current and future dealer or a qualified workshop. your vehicle. European standards and which can be In certain countries, the use of a particular obtained from filling stations: fuel may be required (specific octane The use of any other type of (bio)fuel rating, specific trade name, etc.) to ensure (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Diesel fuel that meets standard correct operation of the engine. domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets For any additional information, contact a dealer. standard EN14214 (possibly containing (risk of damage to the engine and fuel up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester), system).

172 Practical information

Snow chains It is strongly recommended that before Very cold climate screen you leave, you practise fitting the snow In wintry conditions, snow chains improve Removable protective screen which prevents chains on a level and dry surface. traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle the accumulation of snow at the radiator when braking. cooling fan. Avoid driving with snow chains on roads It is recommended that the screen be Snow chains must be fitted only to the that have been cleared of snow to avoid fitted and removed by a PEUGEOT dealer front wheels. They must never be fitted to damaging your vehicle's tyres and the or a qualified workshop. "space-saver" type spare wheels. road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the Before fitting or removing a screen, wheel rim. ensure that the engine is off and the Take account of the legislation in force in cooling fan has stopped. your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum authorised speed. Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the Fitting type of wheel fitted to your vehicle: Installation advice F If you have to fit the chains during a journey, Original tyre size Type of chain stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road. F Apply the parking brake and, if necessary, 195/65 R15 place a chock under a wheel to prevent 205/55 R16 9 mm link movement of your vehicle. 7 F Fit the chains following the instructions 225/45 R17 provided by the manufacturer. 225/40 R18 K-Summit K23 F Move off gently and drive for a few 235/35 R19 Polar Grip 70 F Position the screen in front of the top part of moments, without exceeding 31 mph the upper grille in the front bumper. (50 km/h). For more information, contact a PEUGEOT F Press the screen to clip the fixing clips. F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow dealer or a qualified workshop. chains are correctly tightened.

173 Practical information

Removing Use towing devices and their genuine Towing device with towball harnesses approved by PEUGEOT. It F Use a screwdriver as a lever to release each is recommended that the installation be fixing clip. Before each use performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Check that the towball is correctly fitted, qualified workshop. Do not forget to remove the very cold verifying the follow points: If the towing device is not fitted by climate screen: Hatchback: a PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be - when the external temperature is greater - the green mark on the locking wheel fitted in accordance with the vehicle than 10°C (example: in summer, etc.), is in line with the green mark on the manufacturer's instructions. - in the event of towing, towball, Certain driving assistance or manoeuvring - at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). - the locking wheel is in contact with the assistance functions are automatically towball (position A). disabled if an approved towing device is - the safety lock is on and the key used. removed; the locking wheel can no Towing device longer be operated, - the towball must not be able to move in Load distribution Observe the maximum authorised towable F its carrier; test by shaking it with your Distribute the load in the trailer so that the weight, indicated on your vehicle's hand. heaviest items are as close as possible to registration certificate, the manufacturer's the axle and the nose weight approaches SW: label as well as in the Technical data - the towball is correctly engaged the maximum permitted without section of this guide. exceeding it. (position A), Complying with the maximum Air density decreases with altitude, thus - the safety lock is on and the key authorised nose weight (towball) reducing engine performance. The maximum removed; the trigger can no longer be also includes the use of accessories load which can be towed must be reduced by operated, (bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.). 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude. - the towball must not be able to move in its carrier; test by shaking it with your hand. Observe the legislation in force in the If the towball is not locked, the trailer can country in which you are driving. detach – accident risk!

GTi towing Your vehicle cannot be fitted with a towing device.

174 Practical information

During use Blanking plug Towing device with Never release the device with a trailer or quickly detachable towball load carrier on the towball. Never exceed the maximum authorised (hatchback) weight for the vehicle – the Gross Train Weight or GTW. Presentation It is essential that the maximum No tools are required to install or remove the authorised load be complied with on the towball on this genuine towing device. towing device: if it is exceeded, this device may detach from the vehicle, which is a serious accident risk. Check that the trailer lamps work correctly. In the event of towing, it is essential to remove Before setting off, check the adjustment of the blanking plug if your vehicle has one. the headlamp beam height. To do this, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a For more information on Headlamp qualified workshop. adjustment, refer to the corresponding section. The blanking plug is located behind the lower air intake grille.

Following use 1. Carrier. When travelling without a trailer or load Protective plug. carrier, the towball must be removed and 2. the blanking plug inserted in the carrier. 3. Connection socket. Safety eye. 7 This measure applies particularly where 4. the towball might obscure visibility of the 5. Detachable towball. number plate or its lighting. 6. Locking/unlocking wheel. 7. Safety key lock. 8. Label to note down the key references.

175 Practical information Fitting the towball

A. Locked position (the green marks are F The locking wheel 6 turns a quarter of a opposite each other); the locking wheel is turn anti-clockwise; take care to keep your F Below the rear bumper, remove the in contact with the towball (no gap). hands clear! protective plug 2 from the towball carrier 1. B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite the green mark); the locking wheel is no longer in contact with the towball (gap of around 5 mm).

Trailers with LED lamps are not compatible with the wiring harness of this device.

To know the Technical data, and, in particular, the towable weights for your vehicle, refer to the corresponding section. F Insert the end of towball into carrier and F Check that the mechanism has correctly To ensure complete safety while driving 5 1 push it upwards; the locking will take place locked in to place (position A). with a Towbar device, refer to the automatically. F Close the lock 7 using the key. corresponding section.

176 Practical information Removing the towball

F Always remove the key. The key cannot be F Insert the key into the lock 7. removed when the lock is open. F Give a quarter turn and pull the trailer plug F Open the lock using the key. F Clip the cap onto the lock. to disconnect it from socket 3 of the carrier. F Detach the cable on the trailer from the safety eye 4 on the carrier. F Detach the trailer from the towball. F Refit the protective cover to the towball.

7 F Hold towball 5 firmly in one hand; using the F Remove the protective cover from the other hand, pull and turn locking wheel 6 towball. fully in a clockwise direction; do not release F Attach the trailer to the towball. the locking wheel. F Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety eye 4 on the carrier. F Insert the trailer plug and give it a quarter turn to connect it to socket 3 of the carrier. F Remove the cap from the lock and press it onto the head of the key.

177 Practical information Maintenance Correct operation is only possible if the towball and its carrier are kept clean. Before cleaning the vehicle with a high- pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed and the protective plug fitted to the carrier.

Apply the label provided to a clearly visible area, close to the carrier or in the boot. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Extract the towball from the bottom of its workshop for any work on the towing carrier 1. device system. F Release the locking wheel; this automatically stops in the unlocked position (position B). 1. Carrier. Towing device with 2. Protective plug. 3. Safety eye. quickly detachable towball 4. Connection socket. (SW) 5. Detachable towball. 6. Locking/unlocking latch. Presentation 7. Locking/unlocking trigger. No tools are required to install or remove the 8. Safety key lock. towball on this genuine towing device. 9. Safety lock protective cap. 10. Stowing bag.

F Refit protective plug 2 to carrier 1. F Carefully stow the towball in its bag away from knocks and dirt.

178 Practical information

A. Locked position To find out the towable weights for your vehicle, consult the "Technical data" section. To ensure complete safety while driving with a Towing device, refer to the corresponding section.

F On the towball, push the latch to the left and Maintenance hold it in this position. F At the same time, push the trigger forwards Correct operation is only possible if the towball to unlock the mechanism (position B). The latch is positioned to the right. and its carrier are kept clean. The trigger is facing towards the rear. Before cleaning the vehicle with a high- pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed B. Unlocked position and the protective plug fitted to the carrier. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for any work on the towing device.

Fitting the towball

F Insert the end of the towball into the carrier 7 and push it as far as it will go.

The latch is positioned to the left. The trigger is facing towards the front.

F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove Observe the legislation in force in the the protective plug from the carrier. country in which you are driving.

179 Practical information

F Attach the trailer to the towball. F Attach the trailer cable to the safety eye fitted on the towball carrier. F Raise the protective cover on the connection socket and connect the trailer electric plug.

Removing the towball

F Ensure that the two pins are in perfect F Unclip and remove the protective cap by contact with the cut-outs in the carrier, that turning it to the right. the trigger has come back towards the rear F Insert the key in the lock and turn it to the and that the latch has moved to the right to left. lock the mechanism (position A). F Remove the key from the lock. F Insert the key in the lock and turn it to the right. F Remove the key from the lock. F Disconnect the trailer electric plug from the F Install the protective cap and clip it into connection socket on the carrier. place by turning it to the left. F Detach the trailer cable from the safety eye on the carrier. F Detach the trailer from the towball.

180 Practical information

- for more than ten minutes, to use the Energy economy mode equipment for up to approximately thirty System which manages the duration of use of minutes. certain functions to conserve a sufficient level Let the engine run for the duration specified to of charge in the battery. ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. After the engine has stopped, you can still use Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the functions such as the audio and telematics engine in order to charge the battery. system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a F On the towball, push the latch to the left and maximum combined duration of about forty A flat battery prevents the engine from hold it in this position. minutes. starting. F At the same time, push the trigger forwards For more information on the 12 V battery, to unlock the mechanism (position ). B Switching to this mode refer to the corresponding section. F Press the trigger fully in and remove the towball by pulling it toward you. A message appears in the instrument panel screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby. Load reduction mode System which manages the use of certain If a telephone call is being made at this functions according to the level of charge time, it will be maintained for around remaining in the battery. 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free When the vehicle is being driven, the load kit of your audio system. reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as air conditioning, heated rear screen, etc. 7 Exiting the mode The deactivated functions are reactivated F Install and clip the protective plug in the automatically as soon as conditions permit. These functions will be automatically restored carrier located below the rear bumper. the next time the vehicle is used. F Stow the towball in its bag. In order to restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run: - for less than ten minutes, to use the equipment for approximately five minutes,

181 Practical information

Fitting roof bars Do not exceed the maximum authorised As a safety measure and to avoid load, shown in the instructions for the roof damaging the roof, it is essential to use Fitting directly to the roof bars. the transverse bars approved for your When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the vehicle. points located in the roof frame. The points are speed of the vehicle to the profile of the Observe the instructions on fitting and use hidden by the vehicle doors when closed. road to avoid damaging the roof bars and contained in the guide supplied with the the fixings on the roof. roof bars. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects that are longer than Recommendations the vehicle. Distribute the load uniformly, taking care to avoid overloading one of the sides. Arrange the heaviest part of the load as Fitting on longitudinal bars close as possible to the roof. Secure the load securely. Drive gently: the vehicle will be more susceptible to the effects of side winds and the stability of the vehicle may be affected. On a long journey, check the security of the load at every stop. Remove the roof bars once they are no longer needed.

Use accessories recommended by PEUGEOT, observing the manufacturer's The transverse bars must be fixed at the recommendations and fitting instructions engraved markings on the longitudinal bars. so as to avoid the risk of damaging the body (deformation, scratches, etc.).

182 Practical information Bonnet Opening F Open the left-hand front door. Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid the risk of injury related to an automatic change to START mode.

Engines F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. F Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the Petrol door frame, towards you.

Do not open the bonnet when there is a very strong wind. When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with care (risk of burns). In order to avoid damaging the electrical units, it is expressly prohibited to use high pressure washing to clean the engine Diesel compartment. 7 Closing F Pull the safety catch towards you, then raise F Take the stay out of the support slot. the bonnet. F Clip the stay in its housing. F Lower the bonnet and release it near the end of its travel. F Pull on the bonnet to check that it has These engines are examples provided as a latched correctly. guide.

183 Practical information

1. Screenwash fluid reservoir. The liquid must comply with the Engine oil level 2. Engine coolant reservoir. manufacturer's recommendations and with 3. Brake fluid reservoir. The check is carried out either when the vehicle's engine. the ignition is switched on using the oil 4. Battery/Fuses. level indicator in the instrument panel 5. Fusebox. for vehicles equipped with an electric Take care when working under the bonnet, 6. Air filter. gauge, or using the dipstick. 7. Engine oil dipstick. as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the 8. Engine oil filler cap. cooling fan could start at any time (even To ensure that the reading is correct, your 9. Remote earth point. with the ignition off). vehicle must be parked on a level surface 10. Priming pump* with the engine stopped for more than 30 minutes. * Depending on engine. Used products It is normal to top up the oil level between The Diesel circuit is under very high two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT pressure. Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or recommends that you check the level, and top All work on this circuit must be carried out fluids with the skin. up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Most of these fluids are harmful to health Checking using the dipstick workshop. or indeed very corrosive. The location of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. Checking levels Do not discard used oil or fluids into F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and sewers or onto the ground. pull it out completely. Check all of these levels regularly, in line with Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them a qualified workshop and dispose of it in non-fluffy cloth. up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. the containers reserved for this purpose. F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then If a level drops significantly, have the pull it out again to make the visual check: corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT the correct level is between marks A and B. dealer or a qualified workshop.

184 Practical information

F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any The brake fluid level must be between spills on engine components (risk of fire). the marking "A" (MAX located on the F Wait a few minutes before checking the remote reservoir) and the marking "B" level again using the dipstick. (MIN located on the main reservoir). If F Add more oil if necessary. it is not, check the brake pad wear. A = MAX F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil B = MIN filler cap and the dipstick in its tube. Changing the fluid Refer to the personalised service schedule for your vehicle.

If you find that the level is above the A mark or After topping up the oil, the check when Fluid specification below the B mark, do not start the engine. switching on the ignition with the oil level This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk of indicator in the instrument panel is not recommendations. damage to the engine), contact a PEUGEOT valid during the 30 minutes after topping dealer or a qualified workshop. up. - If the level is below the MIN mark, you must top up the engine oil. Coolant level Engine oil change Oil grade Check the coolant level regularly. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine It is normal to top up this fluid Before topping up the oil or changing the oil, and emissions control system, never use between two services. check that the oil is the correct grade for your additives in the engine oil. engine and conforms to the manufacturer's The check and top-up must only be done with recommendations. Brake fluid level the engine cold. 7 Topping up the engine oil level A low coolant level presents a risk of serious damage to your engine. The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" corresponding underbonnet layout view. mark but should never exceed it. F Unscrew the oil filler cap to access the filler If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, opening. it is essential to top up.

185 Practical information

When the engine is hot, the temperature of this In wintry conditions, it is recommended 12 V battery fluid is regulated by the fan. that you use an ethyl alcohol or methanol In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, The battery does not require any maintenance. based fluid. wait at least one hour after switching off the However, check regularly that the terminals engine before carrying out any work. are correctly tightened (versions without quick To avoid the risk of scalding when you need to release terminals) and that the connections top up in an emergency, place a cloth around are clean. the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to Diesel fuel additive level allow the pressure to drop. (Diesel with particle filter) For more information on the precautions Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap to take before starting work on the 12 V and top up to the required level. A low additive level is indicated by illumination of this warning lamp, battery, refer to the corresponding Fluid specification accompanied by an audible warning section. and a message in the instrument This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's panel screen. recommendations. Versions equipped with Stop & Start are Topping up fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of The cooling fan may start after specific technology and specification. switching off the engine: take care This additive must be topped up without delay Its replacement should be carried out with articles and clothing that might be by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified caught by the fan blades. workshop. Checks Screenwash fluid level Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the Air filter manufacturer's service schedule and according Top up to the required level when Depending on the environment to your engine. necessary. (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), dealer or a qualified workshop. replace it twice as often if Fluid specification necessary. For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fluid must not be topped up or replaced with plain water.

186 Practical information

Passenger compartment filter As soon as the traffic conditions permit, Automatic gearbox regenerate the filter by driving at a speed Depending on the environment of at least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the The gearbox does not require any warning lamp goes off. use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), maintenance (no oil change). If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates replace it twice as often if a low Diesel additive level. necessary. For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section. Parking brake If excessive travel or a loss of A clogged passenger compartment effectiveness of this system is filter may have an adverse effect on noticed, the parking brake must the performance of the air conditioning On a new vehicle, the first particle be checked, even between two system and generate undesirable odours. filter regeneration operations may be services. accompanied by a "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. This system must be checked by a PEUGEOT Oil filter Following prolonged operation of the dealer or a qualified workshop. vehicle at very low speed or at idle, Change the oil filter each time the you may, in exceptional circumstances, engine oil is changed. notice the emission of water vapour at the Brake pads exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the Brake wear depends on the style Particle filter (Diesel) environment. of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short The start of saturation of the particle distances. It may be necessary to filter is signalled by the temporary have the condition of the brakes 7 illumination of this warning lamp checked, even between vehicle accompanied by a message warning Manual gearbox services. of the risk of the filter clogging up. The gearbox does not require any Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in maintenance (no oil change). the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

187 Practical information

The pressures given on the tyre pressure label Brake disc/drum wear Only use products recommended by are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven for PEUGEOT or products of equivalent more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles quality and specification. For information on checking (10 kilometres) at more than 31 mph (50 km/h), In order to optimise the operation of brake disc/drum wear, contact a 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be added to the values components as important as those in the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified given on the label. braking system, PEUGEOT selects and workshop. Under-inflation increases fuel consumption. offers very specific products. Non-compliant tyre pressure causes premature After washing the vehicle, dampness, or wear on tyres and has an adverse effect on the in wintry conditions, ice can form on the vehicle's road holding – Risk of an accident! brake discs and pads: braking efficiency Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces may be reduced. Make light brake Electric parking brake braking efficiency and control of the vehicle's applications to dry and defrost the brakes. steering. Regular inspections of the condition This system does not require any of tyres (tread and sides) and rims are specific check. However, in the recommended as well as making sure that event of a problem, have the system valves are fitted. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a ® Using different size wheels and tyres from qualified workshop. AdBlue (BlueHDi those specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, engines) wheel rotation, ground clearance and the To respect the environment and ensure speedometer reading and have an adverse For more information on the Electric compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without effect on road holding. parking brake, refer to the corresponding adversely affecting the performance or fuel Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles section. consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT can cause the ESC to mistime. has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with a system that associates SCR (Selective Wheels and tyres Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. The pressure must be checked on all tyres, including the spare wheel, when the tyres are "cold", at least SCR system once a month and before a long Using a fluid called AdBlue® containing urea, journey. a catalytic converter converts up to 85% of nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are harmless to health and the environment. 188 Practical information

The AdBlue® is contained in For more information on the Warning You can also visit a service station a special tank holding about and indicator lamps and the associated equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially 17 litres. alerts, refer to the corresponding section. designed for passenger vehicles (for those versions with access to the AdBlue® tank An alert system is triggered automatically once Freezing of the AdBlue® via the fuel filler flap). the reserve level is reached: you can then drive AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below for a further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the around -11°C. tank is empty. The SCR system includes a heater for the Never top up from an AdBlue® dispenser ® AdBlue tank, allowing you to continue reserved for heavy goods vehicles. driving in very cold conditions. Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a system required by regulations prevents starting of the engine. Supply of AdBlue® Recommendations on If the SCR system is faulty, the level of storage emissions from your vehicle will no longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and becomes polluting. It is recommended that the AdBlue® is deteriorates above 25°C. It should be stored in In the event of a confirmed fault with the topped up as soon as the first alert is a cool place and protected from direct sunlight. SCR system, you must go to a PEUGEOT issued indicating that the reserve level has Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept dealer or a qualified workshop as soon been reached. for at least a year. as possible: after travelling the distance If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it of 685 miles (1,100 km), a system will be In order to ensure that the SCR system has completely thawed out. triggered automatically to prevent the operates correctly: engine from starting. - Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the 7 In either case, a range indicator gives you ISO 22241 standard. Never keep AdBlue® containers in your the distance you can travel before the - Never transfer AdBlue® to another vehicle. vehicle is immobilised. container: it would lose its purity. ® - Never dilute AdBlue with water. Precautions for use

AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This liquid You can obtain AdBlue® from a PEUGEOT is non-flammable, colourless and odourless dealer or a qualified workshop. (when kept in a cool place).

189 Practical information

In the event of contact with the skin, wash the In the event of an AdBlue® breakdown, Important: in the event of a top-up after a affected area with soap and water. In the event confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue: breakdown because of a lack of AdBlue, of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the Starting impossible", you must top up with you must wait around 5 minutes before eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye at least 5 litres. switching on the ignition, without opening wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel the driver’s door, locking the vehicle, a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get introducing the key into the ignition medical attention. switch, or introducing the key of the ​ If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth Never pour AdBlue® into the Diesel fuel Keyless Entry and Starting system into with clean water and then drink plenty of water. tank. the passenger compartment. In certain conditions (at high temperature, Switch on the ignition, then wait for for example), the risk of release of ammonia 10 seconds before starting the engine. cannot be excluded: do not inhale the vapour. For the specifics associated with the ® Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous access configuration for the AdBlue tank membranes (eyes, nose and throat). (via the boot or via the fuel filler flap), refer to the descriptions given in detail further on.

If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are Keep AdBlue® in its original container and any spillages on the side of the body, rinse out of the reach of children. immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off Procedure using a sponge and hot water. Before starting the top up procedure, ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. In winter, check that the temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C. If not, due to freezing, the AdBlue® cannot be poured into the tank. Park your vehicle somewhere warmer for a few hours before topping up.

190 Practical information Access to the AdBlue® tank With subwoofer via the boot Filling the AdBlue® tank is an operation included in every routine service on your vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it may be necessary to top up the fluid between services, as soon as an alert (warning lamps and a message) indicates it. You can go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Working inside the boot, lift the carpet and workshop. then, depending on the equipment, lift out If you intend to do the topping-up yourself, the spare wheel and/or the storage well. - Carefully disengage the wiring harness from read the following procedure carefully. F Without pressing, turn the black cap a its housing to give a little more free cable The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off. length. topping up. F Turn the blue cap anti-clockwise. - Undo the central nut and remove the ® fastener (nut and bolt). F Switch off the ignition and remove the key. F Obtain non-drip bottles of AdBlue . After first checking the use-by date, carefully read the instructions for use on the label before pouring the contents of the bottle into your vehicle's AdBlue® tank. F After filling, perform the same operations in reverse order. 7

F Place the subwoofer to the side of the boot.

191 Practical information

Read the following procedure carefully to be able to top up properly. F Switch off the ignition and remove the key. F With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler flap open, turn the AdBlue® blue filler cap anti-clockwise. F Obtain a AdBlue® container. After first checking the use-by date, read the instructions on the label carefully before pouring the contents of the container into your vehicle's AdBlue® tank. F Remove or raise the storage well. Or F Insert the AdBlue® pump nozzle and refill For reassembly, first slacken the nut by a few the tank until the nozzle stops automatically. turns.

® Access to the AdBlue tank Important: via the fuel filler flap To avoid overflowing the AdBlue® tank, it A blue cap behind the fuel filler flap indicates is recommended: access to the AdBlue® tank. F To top up between 10 and 13 litres using AdBlue® containers. Or F If filling in a service station, stop after the third automatic shut-off of the nozzle.

F After refilling, carry out these same operations in reverse order.

192 In the event of a breakdown

Tool kit The jack must only be used to change a wheel With temporary puncture repair with a damaged or punctured tyre. kit This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle. Do not use any jack other than the one supplied Its content depends on your vehicle's with this vehicle. equipment: If the vehicle does not have its original jack, - temporary puncture repair kit, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified - spare wheel. workshop to obtain the correct jack for it. The jack meets European standards, as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/CE. The jack does not require any maintenance. Access to the tools

List of tools 4. Temporary puncture repair kit (depending on equipment). Contains a 12 V compressor and a cartridge of sealant to temporarily repair the wheel and adjust the tyre pressure. 5. Speed limit sticker. For more information on the Temporary 1. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (depending puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding The tools are stored in the boot under the floor. on equipment). section. 2. Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box) (depending on equipment). All of these tools are specific to your Used for adapting the wheelbrace to the vehicle and may vary depending on special "security" bolts. 8 equipment. 3. Removable towing eye. Do not use them for any other purposes. For more information on Towing the vehicle and using the removable towing eye, refer to the corresponding section.

193 In the event of a breakdown With spare wheel Temporary puncture Composition of the kit repair kit (type 1)

Scan the QR code on page 3 to view explanatory videos.

Comprising a compressor and a sealant cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures which 1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread gauge. or shoulder. 5. Wheelbrace. 2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose. For removing the wheel trim and removing 3. Speed limit sticker. the wheel bolts. 6. Jack with integrated handle. The vehicle's electric system allows the Used to raise the vehicle. connection of the compressor for long enough to repair the damaged tyre. Repair procedure 7. Wheel bolt cover remover (depending on equipment). F Park the vehicle without obstructing any traffic For removing the wheel bolt head finishers and apply the parking brake. on alloy wheels. For more information on the Tool kit, refer F Follow the safety instructions (hazard warning to the corresponding section. lamps, warning triangle, wearing high visibility For more information on the Spare wheel, refer vest, etc.) according to the legislation in force to the corresponding section. in the country where you are driving. F Switch off the ignition. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.

194 In the event of a breakdown

F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be The speed limit sticker must be secured repaired, and place it in a clean area. to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's field of vision, to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label. F Connect the pipe from the compressor to the bottle of sealant. F Switch on the ignition. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant have penetrated into the tyre. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly. F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position. F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under the compressor. F Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

Only the 12 V socket located at the front of the vehicle can be used. F Start the compressor by turning the switch to the "l" position until the pressure of the 8 F Turn the sealant bottle over and secure it in F Affix the speed limit sticker. tyre reaches 2 bars. The sealant product is the cut-out provided on the compressor. injected under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect the hose of the valve during this operation (risk of blowback).

195 In the event of a breakdown

After about 7 minutes, if a pressure of 2 bars is not reached, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

F Place the switch in the "O" position. F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug F Drive immediately for approximately three miles from the vehicle's 12 V socket. (five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 12 and F Refit the cap on the valve. 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten F Remove the kit. F Stop to check the repair and measure the tyre firmly. F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant. pressure using the kit. F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position. Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under Take care, the sealant product is harmful (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired the compressor. if swallowed and causes irritation to the using this type of kit. F Connect the compressor's electric plug to eyes. the vehicle's 12 V socket. Keep this product out of the reach of F Switch on the ignition. children. Checking/adjusting tyre The use-by date is marked on the bottle. pressures Only the 12 V socket located at the front After use, do not discard the bottle by the of the vehicle can be used to power the roadside, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or You can also use the compressor, compressor. an authorised waste disposal site. without injecting sealant, to check and, if Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of necessary, adjust the tyre pressures sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and place it in a clean area. The tyre inflation pressures are given on F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the this label. compressor.

196 In the event of a breakdown

Should the pressure of one or more tyres For more information on the Tool kit, refer be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise to the corresponding section. the under-inflation detection system. For more information on Tyre under- inflation detection, refer to the corresponding section. Composition of the kit

F Switch on the compressor by moving the Temporary puncture switch to the "I" position and adjust the repair kit (type 2) pressure as shown on the vehicle tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black Scan the QR code on page 3 to view button on the compressor hose. by the explanatory videos. valve connector. This kit comprises a compressor and a sealant cartridge. A. "Repair" or "Air" position selector. If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after It allows the temporary repair of a tyre. On I/off O switch. 7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is not You are then able to go to the nearest garage. B. repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or It is designed to repair most punctures which C. Deflation button. a qualified workshop for assistance. could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread D. Pressure gauge (in bars and psi). or shoulder. Its compressor can be used to check and adjust the pressure of the tyre. F Once the correct pressure is reached, put the switch to the "O" position. F 8 Remove the kit then stow it.

Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km) The vehicle's electric system allows the with the repaired tyre; see a PEUGEOT connection of the compressor for long dealer or a qualified workshop to change enough to repair the damaged tyre. the tyre. 197 In the event of a breakdown

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which The speed limit sticker must be secured have penetrated into the tyre. to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's field of vision, to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

E. Compartment housing a cable with an The tyre inflation pressures are given on adaptor for a 12 V socket. this label. F. Sealant cartridge. G. White pipe with cap for repair and inflation. F Uncoil the white pipe G fully. F Start the vehicle and leave the engine H. Speed limit sticker. F Unscrew the cap from the white pipe. running. F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the tyre to be repaired. Repair procedure Do not start the compressor before F 1. Sealing Connect the compressor's electric plug to connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the vehicle's 12 V socket. the sealant product would be expelled F Park the vehicle without obstructing any through the pipe. traffic and apply the parking brake. Only the 12 V socket located at the front F Follow the safety instructions (hazard of the vehicle can be used. F Switch on the compressor by moving warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing switch B to position I until the tyre pressure high visibility vest, etc.) according to the F Affix the speed limit sticker. reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant product is legislation in force in the country where you injected under pressure into the tyre; do not are driving. disconnect the pipe from the valve during F Switch off the ignition. this operation (risk of blowback). F Turn the selector A to the "Repair" position. F Check that switch B is in position "O".

198 In the event of a breakdown

If after approximately seven minutes this 2. Inflation As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT pressure is not reached, this indicates dealer or a qualified workshop. that the tyre is not repairable; contact a You must inform the technician that you PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop have used this kit. After inspection, the for assistance. technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced. F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe. Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit F Adjust the pressure using the compressor to hand. (to inflate: switch B in position I; to deflate: switch B in position O and press button F Turn selector A to the "Air" ), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre Take care, the sealant product is harmful C position. pressure label (located on the driver's door if swallowed and causes irritation to the frame). eyes. A significant loss of pressure indicates that Keep this product out of the reach of F Uncoil the white pipe G fully. the puncture has not been fully plugged; children. F Connect the white pipe to the tyre valve. F Connect the compressor's electric plug to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the vehicle's 12 V socket. workshop for assistance. F Remove the kit then stow it.

Only the 12 V socket located at the front of the vehicle can be used.

F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph (80 km/h) max.) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 125 miles (200 km). 8 F Drive immediately for approximately three The tyre inflation pressures are given on miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed this label. (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. F Stop to check the repair and measure the F Restart the vehicle and leave the engine tyre pressure using the kit. running. 199 In the event of a breakdown Removing the pipe and F Remove the pipe assembly 2. F Keep the compressor vertical. cartridge F Unscrew the cartridge 4 from the bottom. To fit the new cartridge and new pipe, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Be careful of fluid discharge. The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the cartridge. The sealant cartridge is designed for F Turn selector A to the "Air" single use; it must be replaced even if only position. partly used. F Turn the pipe assembly 2 to the left until it F Uncoil the white pipe G fully. After use, do not discard the cartridge into comes into contact with the unit. F Connect the pipe to the tyre the environment, take it to an authorised F Disconnect the connector 1 from the valve. waste disposal site or a PEUGEOT dealer. cartridge by turning it a quarter turn anti- Do not forget to obtain a new sealant clockwise. cartridge, available from PEUGEOT F Connect the compressor's electric plug to F Pull the pipe assembly 2 out slightly, then dealers or from a qualified workshop. the vehicle's 12 V socket. disconnect the connector 3 from the air intake pipe by turning it a quarter turn anti- Only the 12 V socket located at the front clockwise. of the vehicle can be used.

F Start the vehicle and leave the engine Checking/adjusting tyre running. pressures

You can also use the compressor, without injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures. The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.

200 In the event of a breakdown F Adjust the pressure using the compressor Spare wheel F Park the vehicle without obstructing any (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: traffic and apply the parking brake. switch B in position "O" and press button F Follow the safety instructions (hazard C), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure Scan the QR code on page 3 to view warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing label. explanatory videos. high visibility vest, etc.) according to the legislation in force in the country where you Procedure for changing a damaged wheel with are driving. the spare wheel using the tools provided with F Switch off the ignition. If after approximately seven minutes this the vehicle. pressure is not reached, this indicates Access to the spare wheel that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop For more information on the Tool kit, refer for assistance. to the corresponding section.

F Remove the kit then stow it. The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km) with the repaired tyre; see a PEUGEOT The jack does not require any dealer or a qualified workshop to change maintenance. the tyre.

The jack meets European standards, The spare wheel is installed in the boot under Should the pressure of one or more tyres as defined in the Machinery Directive the floor. be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise 2006/42/EC. Depending on the country of sale, the spare the under-inflation detection system. wheel may be steel, alloy or of the "space- For more information on Tyre under- saver" type. inflation detection, refer to the Wheel with wheel trim For access to the spare wheel, first refer to the corresponding section. When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel section on the Tool kit. 8 trim, starting by placing its aperture in line with the valve and then pushing it into place all round its edge with the palm of your hand.

201 In the event of a breakdown

Removing the wheel Removing a wheel

Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery. With a manual parking brake, apply the parking brake and check that the brake warning lamp is on. With an electric parking brake, if not programmed in automatic mode, apply the parking brake and check that the brake warning lamp and the P indicator lamp in F Unscrew the (coloured) central nut. F Put the box back in place in the centre of the parking brake control lever are on. F Remove the ffastener (nut and bolt). the wheel and clip it. Switch off the ignition. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the F Put the polystyrene storage box back in With a manual gearbox, engage first gear rear. place. to block the wheels. F Take the wheel out of the boot. With an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P to block the wheels. Putting the wheel back in place The occupants must get out of the vehicle F Put the wheel back in its housing. and wait where they are safe. F Give the (coloured) nut on the bolt a few Never go underneath a vehicle raised turns to loosen it. using a jack; use an axle stand. F Position the fastener (nut and bolt) in the middle of the wheel. F Tighten fully until the central nut clicks to retain the wheel correctly.

202 In the event of a breakdown

F Place the foot of the jack on the ground and ensure that it is directly below the A or B jacking point provided on the underbody, F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient whichever is closest to the wheel to be space between the wheel and the ground F Remove the bolt cover(s) using the tool 7 changed. to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel (depending on equipment). easily. F Fit the security socket 2 on the wheelbrace 5 to slacken the security bolt (depending on equipment). F Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only.

Do not use: - the jack for any other purpose than lifting the vehicle, - a jack other than the one supplied by the manufacturer. F Extend the jack 6 until its head comes into contact with the jacking point A or B, F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean 8 whichever is used, with the contact surface place. A or B on the vehicle correctly engaged with F Remove the wheel. the central part of the head of the jack.

203 In the event of a breakdown

Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or collapse – Risk of injury! Take care to place the jack strictly at the jacking points A or B under the vehicle, making sure that the contact point on the vehicle is centred on the head of the jack. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or the jack collapsing – Risk of injury! F Tighten the security bolt using the F Put the wheel in place on the hub. wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security socket F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop. 2 (depending on equipment). Fitting a wheel F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the F Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security socket wheelbrace 5 only. 2 (depending on equipment). F Refit the bolt cover(s) (depending on F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the version). wheelbrace 5 only. F Store the tools in the box.

Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the "space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical contact of each bolt. F Lower the vehicle fully. F Fold the jack 6 and detach it.

204 In the event of a breakdown

After changing a wheel Changing a bulb In some weather conditions (e.g. low To store the punctured wheel in the boot temperature or humidity), the presence correctly, first remove the central cover. The headlamps have polycarbonate of misting on the internal surface of the When using the "space-saver" type spare lenses with a protective coating: glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). F do not clean them using a dry or normal; it disappears after the lamps have Have the tightening of the bolts and the abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent been on for a few minutes. pressure of the spare wheel checked by a or solvent product, PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH without delay. neutral product, Have the punctured wheel repaired and F when using a high pressure washer Light-emitting diodes – replace it on the vehicle as soon as on persistent marks, do not keep the LEDs possible. lance directed towards the lamps or If your vehicle has tyre under-inflation their edges for too long, so as not to For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT detection, check the tyre pressures and damage their protective coating and dealer or a qualified workshop. reinitialise the system. seals. For more information on Tyre under- inflation detection, refer to the Halogen bulbs corresponding section. To ensure good quality lighting, check that the bulb is correctly positioned in its Changing a bulb must only be done with housing. the ignition off and after the lamp has been switched off for several minutes – Risk of serious burns! F Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. The tyre inflation pressures are given on It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet this label. (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the lamp. 8 Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.

205 In the event of a breakdown Front lamps With "full LED" technology Access to headlamps (halogen headlamps model) With halogen headlamps Opening of bonnet/Access to bulbs With the engine hot, proceed with caution – Risk of burns! Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the engine fan – Risk of strangulation!

1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps (LED). 1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps (LED). 2. Dipped beam headlamps (LED). 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7). 3. Main beam headlamps (LED). 3. Main beam headlamps (HB3). 4. Direction indicators (LED). 4. Direction indicators (PY21W). 5. Foglamps (H11 or LED for GT/GT Line 5. Foglamps (H11 or LED for GT/GT Line versions). versions). To facilitate access to the front lamps, the Do not touch the "Full LED" technology headlamp must first be moved forward a few headlamps. Risk of electrocution! centimetres: Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Move the orange clip towards the rear then workshop. while pressing on the black part (located above the orange clip) pull on the connector. F Remove the two screws that hold the headlamp. F Disengage the rear pin then the front centre piece. F Move the headlamp forwards.

206 In the event of a breakdown

Dipped beam headlamps (halogen Main beam headlamps (halogen Foglamps (except GT/GT Line model) model) versions)

F Remove the protective plastic cover by F Remove the protective plastic cover by F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top pulling the tab. pulling the tab. (notch). F Disconnect the bulb connector. F Turn the connector with the bulb a quarter of F Unscrew the two screws to remove the unit F Detach the two springs (press then spread a turn upwards. from its housing. towards the outside). F Pull out the bulb to remove it and replace it. F Pull out the bulb to remove it and replace it. To refit, proceed in reverse order. To refit, proceed in reverse order.

The zone behind the right lamp may reach a high temperature (degassing hoses): risk of burns. 8

207 In the event of a breakdown

Direction indicators (halogen model)

The direction indicator bulb is located below the headlamp. F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top F Unscrew the bulb holder 1/4 of a turn. (notch). F Remove the bulb holder. F Unscrew the bulb holder (1/4 of a turn). F Replace the faulty bulb. F Replace the faulty bulb. To refit, proceed in reverse order. F Disconnect the connector. To refit, proceed in reverse order. F Unscrew the bulb holder 1/4 of a turn. F Remove the bulb holder. F Replace the faulty bulb. Quicker flashing of the direction indicator To refit, proceed in reverse order, pressing on lamp (left or right) indicates the failure of Integrated direction indicator the finisher to refit it. one of the bulbs on the corresponding side repeaters (LED) side. Door mirror spotlamps (LED)

208 In the event of a breakdown Rear lamps (hatchback)

F Unclip the two access covers, left and right. 1. Sidelamps (light-emitting diodes – LEDs). F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Unscrew the bolts located in each opening. 2. Reversing lamps (W16W). F Remove the lamp fixing nut. F Unclip the boot trim to access the lamp 3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). F Extract the lamp unit carefully from the connector. 4. Brake lamps (light-emitting diodes – LEDs). outside. F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Unscrew the bulb holder (1/4 of a turn) and F Remove the lamp fixing nut. 5. Foglamps (P21W). replace the bulb. F Extract the lamp unit carefully from the To refit, proceed in reverse order. outside. F Unscrew the bulb holder (1/4 of a turn) and Reversing lamps, direction replace the bulb. indicators (on the wings) Foglamps (tailgate) To refit, proceed in reverse order.

Rear lamps (SW) 8

1. Sidelamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs). F Open the tailgate and then remove the F Open the tailgate then remove the large 2. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). access cover. plastic cover. 209 In the event of a breakdown

3. Brake lamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs). Reversing lamp, foglamp 4. Reversing lamps (W16W). (tailgate) 5. Foglamps (P21W).

Direction indicators (on the wings)

F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Remove the sealing foam. F Unclip the bulb holder by pressing the two tabs. F Replace the bulb. To refit, proceed in reverse order.

F Open the tailgate and then remove the access cover. F Remove the lamp fixing nut.

F Open the tailgate and then remove the access cover. F Remove the two lamp fixing nuts (pipe wrench recommended). F Unclip the pre-retaining clip, carefully removing the lamp from the outside as you do so. 210 In the event of a breakdown Number plate lamps (W5W) Changing a fuse Access to the tools

F Extract the lamp unit carefully from the outside. F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Foglamp: unclip the bulb holder by pressing F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut- the two tabs, then replace the bulb. outs in the lens. F Reversing lamp: turn the bulb holder a F Push it outwards to unclip it. quarter of a turn, then replace the bulb. F Remove the lens. F To refit, proceed in reverse order. Replace the faulty bulb. The extraction tweezers are fitted to the back To refit, press the lens to clip it in. of the dashboard fusebox cover. F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, Third brake lamp (LED) then right. F Disengage the cover completely and turn it over. F Remove the tweezers from the back of the cover that they are fitted to. 8

211 In the event of a breakdown Changing a fuse Dashboard fuses Before changing a fuse: F the cause of the failure must be identified The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard and rectified, (left-hand side). F all electrical consumers must be switched Tweezers off, Access to the fuses F the vehicle must be immobilised with the Replacement with a fuse not shown in the ignition off, allocation tables that follow may cause F identify the faulty fuse using the existing a serious malfunction of your vehicle. allocation tables and diagrams. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified To remove or fit a fuse, it is essential to: workshop. F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse from its housing and check the condition of Installing electrical accessories its filament. Your vehicle's electrical system is F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse designed to operate with standard or of the same rating (same colour); using a optional equipment. different rating could cause faults (risk of Before installing other electrical fire). equipment or accessories on your vehicle, If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT workshop to check their comparability. dealer or a qualified workshop. F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then right. PEUGEOT accepts no responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with specifications, in particular when the combined power consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds Good Failed 10 milliamperes.

212 In the event of a breakdown

Table of fuses

Fuse Rating Functions No. (A)

F9 5 Alarm, emergency and assistance calls F13 5 Reversing camera and parking sensors F15 15 12 V accessory socket. F16 15 Cigarette lighter. F17 15 Audio system. F18 20 Touch screen, CD player, audio and navigation system. F19 5 Rain, sunshine sensor. F20 5 Airbags. F21 5 Instrument panel. F22/F24 30 Internal/external locks, front and rear.

F23 5 Glove box lamp, vanity mirror, front and rear courtesy lamps.

F25/F27 15 Front/rear screenwash pump. F26 15 Horn. F30 15 Rear wiper. 8

213 In the event of a breakdown Engine compartment fuses Table of fuses

Fuse Rating Functions The fusebox is placed in the engine No. (A) compartment near the battery. F13 5 Built-in systems interface. Access to the fuses F16 15 Front foglamps. F18 10 Right-hand main beam headlamp. F19 10 Left-hand main beam headlamp. F25 40 Headlamp washer relay (after-market). F27 25 Built-in systems interface. F28 30 Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue®). F29 30 Front wiper motor.

F Unclip the cover. Pre-heater plugs (Diesel), additional programmable heating F30 80 F Change the fuse. (after-market), headlamp wash pump. F When you have finished, close the cover very carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

214 In the event of a breakdown

F Remove the plastic cover to access the the Versions equipped with Stop & Start are 12 V battery (+) terminal. fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of Procedure for starting the engine using another specific technology and specification. The battery (-) terminal is not accessible. A battery or charging a discharged battery. Its replacement should be carried out remote earth point is located on the engine only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified mounting. workshop. General points Starting using another Lead-acid starter batteries battery Before doing any work When your vehicle's battery is flat, the engine Immobilise the vehicle: apply the parking can be started using a backup battery (external Batteries contain harmful substances brake, put the gearbox in neutral, then or from another vehicle) and jump leads or a such as sulphuric acid and lead. switch off the ignition. battery booster. They must be disposed of in accordance Check that all electrical equipment is with regulations and must not, in any switched off. circumstances, be discarded with Never try to start the engine by connecting household waste. Access to the battery a battery charger. Take used remote control batteries and Never use a 24 V or higher battery vehicle batteries to a special collection booster. point. First check that the backup battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged Protect your eyes and face before battery. handling the battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact All operations on the battery must be with each other. carried out in a well ventilated area and Switch off all the electrical consumers away from naked flames and sources of on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion lighting, etc.). or fire. Make sure that the jump leads are not 8 Wash your hands afterwards. The battery is located under the bonnet. close to moving parts of the engine (fan, To access it: belts, etc.). F Open the bonnet using the interior release Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while lever, then the exterior safety catch. the engine is running. F Secure the bonnet stay.

215 In the event of a breakdown F Start the engine of the vehicle with the Charging the battery using good battery and leave it running for a few minutes. a battery charger F Operate the starter on the broken down For optimum service life of the battery, it is vehicle and let the engine run. essential to maintain an adequate state of If the engine does not start straight away, charge. switch off the ignition and wait a few moments In some circumstances it may be necessary to before trying again. charge the battery: - If you use your vehicle essentially for short F Wait for it to return to idle. journeys. F Disconnect the jump lead cables in reverse - If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for order. several weeks. F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified your vehicle has one. workshop. F Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an If you wish to charge your vehicle's battery adequate state of charge. yourself, use only a charger compatible F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if with lead-acid batteries with a nominal your vehicle has one. voltage of 12 V. F Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of Some functions, including Stop & Start, flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to are not available if the battery is not the (+) terminal of backup battery B or the sufficiently charged. Follow the instructions provided by the booster. manufacturer of the charger. F Connect one end of the green or black Never reverse polarities. cable to the (-) terminal of backup battery B or of the booster (or an earth point on the other vehicle). It is not necessary to disconnect the F Connect the other end of the green or black battery. cable to earth point C on the broken down vehicle. F Switch off the ignition. F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, lighting, wipers, etc.).

216 In the event of a breakdown Disconnecting the battery

In order to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine, it is recommended that the battery be disconnected If this label is present, it is essential to if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing period. irreversible damage to the electrical Before disconnecting the battery: components related to the Stop & Start F close all openings (doors, boot, windows, system. roof), F switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, wipers, lighting, etc.). Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk F switch off the ignition and wait for four of explosion! minutes. If the battery has frozen, have it checked At the battery, detach the (+) terminal only. by a PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop who will check that the internal F Switch off charger B before connecting the components have not been damaged and cables to the battery, so as to avoid any that the container has not cracked, which Quick-release terminal clamp dangerous sparks. would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive F Disconnecting the (+) terminal Ensure that the charger cables are in good acid leaking. condition. F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has one, on the (+) terminal. The Stop & Start system may not be F Connect the cables of charger B as follows: operational during the trip following the - The (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of the first engine start. battery A. In this case, the system will only be - The (-) black cable to the earth point C on available again after a continuous 8 the vehicle. period of immobilisation of the vehicle, F At the end of the charging operation, switch a period which depends on the exterior off charger B before disconnecting the temperature and the state of charge of the F Raise the lever A fully to release the cables from battery A. battery (up to about 8 hours). clamp B. F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. 217 In the event of a breakdown Reconnecting the (+) terminal Following reconnection of the battery Towing Following reconnection of the battery, switch on Procedure for having your vehicle towed or the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to for towing another vehicle using a removable permit initialisation of the electronic systems. If towing eye. minor problems nevertheless persist following this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Access to the tools Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise (depending on version): - the remote control key, - the electric blind(s), F Raise the lever A fully. - etc. F Replace the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. F Push the clamp B fully down. The Stop & Start system may not be F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B. operational during the trip following the first engine start. The towing eye is installed in the boot under Do not force the lever as locking will be In this case, the system will only be the floor. impossible if the clamp is not positioned available again after a continuous To access it: correctly; start the procedure again. period of immobilisation of the vehicle, F open the boot, a period which depends on the exterior F raise the floor, temperature and the state of charge of the F remove the towing eye from the box. battery (up to about 8 hours).

218 In the event of a breakdown

Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle General recommendations Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towbar; rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently. When the vehicle is towed with its engine F In the front bumper, slide a finger from the F Screw in the towing eye fully. off, there is no longer braking and steering centre of the cover to the upper corner (as F Install the towbar. assistance. shown above) to unclip it. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the In the following cases, you must always F Screw in the towing eye fully. towed vehicle. call on a professional recovery service: F Install the towbar. F Set off gently and drive slowly for a short - vehicle broken down on a motorway or F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the distance. main road, towed vehicle. - four-wheel drive vehicle, F Set off gently and drive slowly for a short - when it is not possible to put the distance. gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake, - when it is not possible to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox, engine running, Put the gear lever into neutral. - towing with only two wheels on the 8 Failure to adhere to this instruction ground, may lead to damage to braking system - where there is no approved towbar, components and the lack of braking etc. available. assistance on restarting the engine.

219 In the event of a breakdown

For more information on the Electric With BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM5 Other engines parking brake and, in particular, parking (5-speed manual), BlueHDi F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of the vehicle with the brake released, refer 115 S&S and BlueHDi 120 Diesel. to the corresponding section. S&S engines F Open the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of priming pump. Diesel. Running out of fuel F Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine). (Diesel) F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel ignition. system must be primed if you run out of fuel. F Repeat the operation 10 times. For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the F Operate the starter to run the engine. corresponding engine compartment view. F Operate the priming pump repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at With BlueHDi 100 S&S the first press). BVM6 (6-speed manual), F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the For more information on Diesel misfuel BlueHDi 130 S&S and engine does not start at the first attempt, prevention, refer to the corresponding wait around 15 seconds before trying section. BlueHDi 180 S&S engines again). F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of F If the engine does not start after a few Diesel. attempts, operate the priming pump again If the engine does not start first time, do F Switch on the ignition (without starting the then start the engine. not keep trying, but start the procedure engine). F Put the cover in place and clip it in. again from the beginning. F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the F Close the bonnet. ignition. F Operate the starter to run the engine. If the engine does not start, repeat the procedure.

220 Technical data

The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load Engine technical data and values indicated are valid up to a maximum towed loads altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude. Engines The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the The engine characteristics are given in the towball. vehicle's registration document, as well as in sales brochures.

High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the The maximum power corresponds to the vehicle to protect the engine. When the value type-approved on a test bed, under exterior temperature is higher than 37°C, conditions defined in European legislation limit the towed weight. (Directive 1999/99/EC).

For more information, contact a PEUGEOT Towing by a lightly loaded vehicle can dealer or a qualified workshop. adversely affect road holding. Braking distances are increased when Weights and towed loads towing a trailer. When using a vehicle to tow, never The weights and towed loads relating to your exceed a speed of approximately 62 mph vehicle are given in the registration document, (100 km/h) (observe the local legislation as well as in sales brochures. in force).

These values are also given on the manufacturer's plate or label. If the exterior temperature is high, it is For more information, contact a PEUGEOT recommended that the engine is allowed dealer or a qualified workshop. to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle 9 comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.

221 Technical data Engines and towed loads – PETROL

Engines PureTech 110 S&S BVM5 PureTech 110 S&S BVM6 PureTech 110 BVM5

Gearboxes Manual 5-speed Manual 6-speed Manual 5-speed

Code EB2DT BE5 EB2ADT STT MB6 EB2DTM BE5

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

Model codes LPHNZB LRHNZB LPHNPP LRHNPP LPHNVA LRHNVA

Capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199

Max power: EC standard (kW) 81 81 81

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,315 1,200 1,200 1,100 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 575 630 575 630 575 630

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71 75 71

222 Technical data

Engines PureTech 130 S&S BVM6 PureTech 130 S&S EAT6 PureTech 130 S&S EAT8

Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 6-speed Automatic 8-speed

Code EB2DTS MCM/EB2ADTS MB6 EB2DTS AT6III EB2ADTS STT ATN8

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

LPHNYH/ LRHNYH/ Model codes LPHNYW LRHNYW LPHNSR LRHNSR LPHNSP LRHNSP

Capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199

Max power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,300 1,200 1,200 1,100 1,300 1,200 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 580 / 570 630 / 620 610 635 610 630

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71 75 71

9

223 Technical data

Engines PureTech 130 BVM6 PureTech 130 EAT6 THP 135 EAT6

Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 6-speed Automatic 6-speed

Code EB2DTSM ML6C EB2DTSM AT6III EP6FDTMD AT6III

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback

Model codes LPHNWG LRHNWG LPHNWV LRHNWV L35GLX

Capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,598

Max power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 99

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,300 1,200 1,200 1,100 600 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 580 630 610 635 600

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71 75

224 Technical data

Engines THP 150 EAT6 THP 165 EAT6 PureTech 225 S&S EAT8

Gearboxes Automatic 6-speed Automatic 6-speed Automatic 8-speed

Code EP6FDTM AT6III EP6FDTM AT6III EP6FADTX STT ATN8

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

Model codes L35GXV L45GXV L35GYV L45GYV L35GGR L45GGR

Capacity (cm3) 1,098 1,598 1,598

Max power: EC standard (kW) 110 121 165

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 600 600 1,400 1,300 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 600 600 635 695

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71 75 71

9

225 Technical data Engines and towed loads GT and GTi – PETROL

Engines THP 205 S&S BVM6 THP 270 S&S BVM6

Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Manual 6-speed

Code EP6FDTX MCM EP6FDTR-MCM

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback

Model codes L35GTH L45GTH L35GNH

Capacity (cm3) 1,560 1,560

Max power: EC standard (kW) 151 200

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,400 1,300 0 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 635 695 0

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 0

226 Technical data Engines and towed loads – DIESEL

BlueHDi 100 BlueHDi 130 S&S BlueHDi 130 S&S BlueHDi 100 S&S Engines HDi 92 BVM5 S&S BVM6 BVM6 EAT8 BVM5

Manual Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed Manual 5-speed Manual 5-speed 6-speed

DV5RD STT Code DV5RC ML6C DV5RC STT ATN8 DV6D BE5 DV6FD BE5 MB6

Body style Hatchback Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

Model codes LBYHYP LBYHZP LCYHZP LBYHZR LRYHZR LB9HPA LC9HPA LBBHYB LCBHYB

Capacity (cm3) 1,499 1,499 1,499 1,560

Max power: EC standard (kW) 75 96 96 68 73

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,300 1,500 1,400 1,400 1,300 1,300 1,200 1,300 1,200 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 615 680 635 690 580 620 615 630

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75 71 75 71 75 71 75 71

9

227 Technical data

Engines BlueHDi 115 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 115 S&S EAT6

Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 6-speed

Code DV6FCD ML6C DV6FCD AT6III

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

Model codes LBBHXH LCBHXH LBBHXW LCBHXW

Capacity (cm3) 1,560

Max power: EC standard (kW) 85

Fuel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,400 1,300 1,300 1,200 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 615 680 635 690

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71

228 Technical data

BlueHDi 120 S&S BlueHDi 120 S&S BlueHDi 150 S&S BlueHDi 150 S&S Engine BVM6 EAT6 BVM6 EAT6

Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 6-speed Manual 6-speed Automatic 6-speed

DW10FD AM6III/ Code DV6FC ML6C DV6FC AT6III DW10FD ML6C DW10FCD AM6III

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

LHAHXW/ LJAHXW/ Model codes LBBHZH LCBHZH LBBHZW LCBHZW LHAHXH LJAHXH LHAHXV LJAHXV

Capacity (cm3) 1,560 1,997 1,997

Max power: EC standard (kW) 88 110 110

Fuel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,400 1,300 1,300 1,200 1,600 1,500 1,500 1,400 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 615 680 635 690 680 690 690 740

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71 75 71 75 71

9

229 Technical data Engines and towed loads GT – DIESEL

Engine BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT6 BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT8

Gearbox Automatic 6-speed Automatic 8-speed

Code DW10FC AMN6 DW10FC AMN8

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW

Model codes LHAHWW LHAHWW LHEHZR LJEHZR

Capacity (cm3) 1,997 1,997

Max power: EC standard (kW) 133 130

Fuel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,500 1,400 1,600 1,600 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer (kg) 695 750 695 750

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 71 75 71

230 Technical data Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

Hatchback SW

9

231 Technical data GT/GTi hatchback GT SW

* GTi version.

232 Technical data Commercial version - the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross train weight), Number of seats: 2 people. - the maximum weight on the front axle, 3 Useable boot volume: 1.31 m - the maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyre/paint label. In metres (m)

Load floor length 1.458

Load width at the wheel arches 1.036 This label on the middle door pillar, driver's Load width at the centre 1.077 side, contains the following information:

Load height - the tyre inflation pressures with and without load, - at the centre 0.916 A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), - the tyre sizes (including the load index and speed rating), - at the roof sill 0.831 under the bonnet. This number is engraved on the chassis near - the spare tyre inflation pressure, - below the load space cover 0.5 the right-hand front wheel arch. - the paint colour code. B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the windscreen lower cross member. This number is recorded on a label, visible Identification markings through the windscreen. Different visible markings for the identification C. Manufacturer's label. The vehicle may be originally equipped and research of your vehicle. This tamperproof label on the middle door with tyres with higher load and speed pillar, right or left-hand side, contains the indices than those indicated on the label, following information: without affecting inflation pressure. - the name of the manufacturer, - the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval number, 9 - the vehicle identification number (VIN), - the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle weight), 233 234 Bluetooth® audio system

® Bluetooth audio system The different functions and settings described vary according to the version and configuration of your vehicle.

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Your audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. All work on the system must be Contents carried out exclusively by a dealer or First steps 2 qualified workshop, to avoid any risk of Steering mounted controls 2 Menus 4 electrocution, fire or mechanical faults. Radio 4 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 6 Media 7 Telephone 9 To avoid discharging the battery, the audio Frequently asked questions 13 system may switch off after a few minutes if the engine is not running. . 1 Bluetooth® audio system

Select the screen display mode, Abandon the current operation. First steps between: Go up one level (menu or folder). Press: On/Off. Date; Audio functions; Trip Rotate: adjust volume. computer; Telephone.

Access to the main menu. Confirm or display contextual menu.

Short press: change audio source (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment Activate/Deactivate TA function connected); streaming). Buttons 1 to 6. (traffic announcements). Long press: display the Telephone Short press: select the preset radio Long press: select type of menu (if a telephone is connected). station. announcement. Long press: preset a radio station. Selection of FM/DAB/AM Adjust audio options: wavebands. Front/rear fader; left/right balance; Radio: bass/treble; loudness; audio Automatic step by step search up/ ambience. down for radio stations. Steering mounted controls Activation/Deactivation of automatic Media: volume adjustment (linked to the Select previous/next USB, Steering mounted controls speed of the vehicle). streaming track. – Type 1 Fast scroll in a list. Radio: Short press: display the list of radio stations. Radio: Long press: update the list. Manual step by step search up/down Radio: Select the previous/next preset radio Media: for radio stations. Short press: display the list of Select previous/next MP3 folder. station. Select the previous/next item in a folders. Media: Long press: display the available Select previous/next folder/genre/ menu or a list. sorting options. artist/playlist on the USB device. Media: Fast scroll in a list. Select the previous/next track. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.

2 Bluetooth® audio system

Radio: Decrease volume. Other than telephone call: Short press: display the list of radio Short press: changing audio source stations. (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment Long press: update the list. connected); streaming), confirmation Media: Mute/Restore sound by if the "Telephone" menu is open. Short press: display the list of simultaneously pressing the Long press: open the "Telephone" folders. increase and decrease volume menu. Long press: display the available buttons. In the event of a telephone call: sorting options. Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call. Other than telephone call: Steering mounted controls During a telephone call: Short press: changing audio source – Type 2 Short press: open the contextual (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment telephone menu. connected); streaming), confirmation Long press: end the call. if the "Telephone" menu is open. Long press: open the "Telephone" menu. Access to the main menu. In the event of a telephone call: Short press: accept the call. Increase volume. Start voice recognition on your Long press: reject the call. smartphone via the system. During a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual Mute/Restore the sound. Radio: telephone menu. Short press: display the list of radio Long press: end the call. stations. Decrease volume. Long press: update the list. Media: Short press: display the list of Confirm a selection. folders. Long press: display the available Increase volume. sorting options. . 3 Bluetooth® audio system

Radio: "Connections": Manage Press one of the buttons to carry out Select the previous/next preset radio connections, search for devices. a manual search up/down for radio station. frequencies. Select the previous/next item in a "Personalisation-configuration": menu or a list. Press this button to display the list of Define the vehicle parameters, Media: stations received locally. Choice of language, Display Select the previous/next track. To update this list, press for more configuration, Choice of units, Date Select the previous/next item in a than two seconds. The sound is cut and time adjustment. menu or a list. while updating. Press the thumbwheel: confirm. Press the "MENU" button.

Menus Move from one menu to another. RDS

Depending on version. Enter a menu. The external environment (hills, buildings, "Multimedia": Media settings, Radio tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may settings. block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in Radio which radio waves are transmitted and "Telephone": Call, Directory does not indicate any failure of the audio management, Telephone Selecting a station equipment. management, Hang up. Press the SOURCE button repeatedly and select the radio. "Trip computer". If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol appears struck out in the screen. Press this button to select a " ": Diagnosis, Warning Maintenance waveband (FM/AM/DAB). log, etc.

Press one of the buttons for an automatic search for radio stations.

4 Bluetooth® audio system

Select "Frequency tracking The RDS, if activated, enables you to Playing INFO messages (RDS)". continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative The INFO function gives priority to alert frequencies. However, in certain conditions, Press OK, RDS is displayed on the messages. To operate, this function coverage of an RDS station may not be screen. needs good reception of a radio station assured throughout the entire country as transmitting this type of message. When a radio stations do not cover 100% of the message is transmitted, the current audio territory. This explains the loss of reception Playing TA messages source (radio, CD, etc.) is interrupted of the station during a journey. automatically to play the INFO message. The TA (Traffic Announcement) function Normal playback resumes at the end of gives priority to TA alert messages. the transmission of the message. Short procedure To be active, this function requires good reception of a radio station that In "Radio" mode, press the OK button to broadcasts this type of message. As activate or deactivate RDS directly. soon as traffic information is broadcast, the media playing (radio, USB, etc.) is Make a long press on this button to Long procedure interrupted automatically to issue the display the list of categories. TA message. Normal play of the media Press the MENU button. is restored after the message has been Select or deselect categories. issued.

Select "Audio functions".

Activate or deactivate the reception Take care when increasing the volume of the corresponding messages. Press OK. while listening to TA messages. The volume may prove too high on return to the original audio source. Select the "FM waveband Displaying TEXT INFOS preferences" function. Press the TA button to activate or Radio text is information transmitted by Press OK. deactivate traffic messages. the radio station related to the station's current programme or song. . 5 Bluetooth® audio system When the radio station is displayed 3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. Terrestrial digital radio in the screen, press OK to display Short press: select the preset radio the contextual menu. station. Long press: memorise a radio station. Digital radio provides a superior audio quality and also additional categories of Select "RadioText (TXT) display" 4 Display the name of the "multiplex" service traffic announcements (TA INFO). and confirm OK to save. being used, also called "ensemble". The different "multiplex/ensemble" 5 Display RadioText (TXT) for the current services offer a choice of radio stations in radio station. alphabetical order. 6 Represents the signal strength for the DAB (Digital Audio band being listened to. Broadcasting) radio Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB, etc.) Depending on version When changing region, an update of the list of preset radio stations is advisable. Change of station within the same If the current DAB radio station is not "multiplex/ensemble". available on FM, "DAB FM" is struck out. Starting of a search for the previous/ next "multiplex/ensemble".

Long press: selection of the categories of news desired among Display of the list of all radio stations Transport, News, Entertainment and and "multiplexes". Special Flash (available depending on the station).

When the radio station is displayed in 1 Options display: if active but not available, the screen, press "OK" to display the the display will be struck out. contextual menu. 2 Display of the name of the current station. (Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information on the station, etc.)

6 Bluetooth® audio system

DAB/FM station tracking If the "DAB" station you are listening to Any additional equipment connected to is not available on FM ("DAB/FM" option the system must conform to the standard "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of struck out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" of the product or standard IEC 60950-1. the country. is not enabled, the sound will be cut when When the digital signal is weak, the digital signal is too weak. "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to The system builds playlists (in temporary continue listening to the same station, memory), an operation which can take from by automatically switching to the a few seconds to several minutes at the first corresponding analogue FM station (if it connection. exists). Media Reduce the number of non-music files and the When the "DAB / FM auto tracking" is number of folders to reduce the waiting time. active, the DAB station will be selected USB port Playlists are updated every time a new USB automatically. memory stick is connected.

Press the MENU button. When the USB port is used, the portable device charges automatically. Select "Multimedia" and confirm.

Play mode Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" The play modes available are: and confirm. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the USB port - Normal: the tracks are played in order, using a suitable cable (not supplied). depending on the classification of the selected files. If "DAB / FM auto tracking" tracking is The system changes automatically to "USB" - Random: the tracks in an album or folder enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds source. are played in a random order. when the system switches to the analogue - Random on all media: all of the tracks FM station sometimes with a change in To protect the system, do not use a USB saved in the media are played in random volume. hub. order. - Repeat: the tracks played are only those from the current album or folder. . 7 Bluetooth® audio system Press this button to display the Press OK to select the desired Auxiliary socket (AUX) contextual menu for the Media classification, then press OK again function. to confirm. (depending on model/depending on equipment)

Press this button to select the Playing files chosen play mode. Make a short press on this button to display the chosen classification. Press this button to confirm.

Navigate in the list using the left/ The choice made is displayed at the top of the Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) right and up/down buttons. screen. to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied). Choosing a track to play Confirm the selection by pressing OK. Any additional equipment connected to Press one of these buttons to go to the system must conform to the standard the previous/next track. Press one of these buttons to go to of the product or standard IEC 60950-1. the previous/next track in the list. Press one of these buttons to go to Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or rewind. the previous/next folder. Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select "AUX". File classification Press one of these buttons to go to the previous/next "Folder"/"Artist"/" First adjust the volume on your portable device Make a long press on this button to Genre"/"Playlist"* in the list. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your display the different classifications. audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.

Select by "Folder"/"Artist"/"Genre" Do not connect a device to both the Jack /"Playlist". auxiliary socket and the USB port at the Depending on availability and type * Depending on availability and the type of same time. of device used. device used. 8 Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio streaming The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of Telephone Streaming allows music files on the telephone your Apple® player. Pairing a Bluetooth® to be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers. telephone Connect the telephone. (Refer to the "Pairing a Bluetooth® Information and advice As a safety measure and because they telephone" section). Via the USB port, the system can play audio require prolonged attention on the part files with the extension ".mp3", ".wma", ".wav", of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with Activate the streaming source by ".cbr", ".vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. the Bluetooth hands-free system of your pressing SOURCE. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. audio system must be carried out with the In certain cases, play of the audio Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma and the ignition on. files must be initiated from the 9 standard. vehicle stationary keypad. The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 kHz. Audio files can be selected using the buttons File names should have fewer than 20 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth on the audio system control panel and the characters, avoiding special characters (e.g. function and ensure that it is "visible to all" steering mounted controls. The contextual « ? ; ù) so as to avoid any reading or display (telephone configuration). information can be displayed in the screen, problems. if the telephone supports the function. The To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. audio quality depends on the quality of The services available depend on transmission by the telephone. the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone ® Connecting Apple players used. Check the instructions for your telephone Connect the Apple® player to the USB port and with your service provider for the using a suitable cable (not supplied). Use only USB memory sticks formatted services to which you have access. Play starts automatically. FAT32 (File Allocation Table). Control is via the audio system. Procedure from the telephone It is recommended that you use genuine The classifications available are those of the Apple® USB cables for correct operation. Select the name of the system in the portable device connected (artists/albums/ list of devices detected. genres/playlists). . 9 Bluetooth® audio system

Procedure from the system Information and advice Select "Connections management" and confirm. The list Press the MENU button. The "Telephone" menu gives access to the of paired devices is displayed. following functions in particular: "Directory", if Select "Connections". your telephone equipment is fully compatible, Confirm with OK. "Call log", "View paired devices". Depending on the type of telephone, you may Indicates that a device is connected. Confirm with OK. be asked to accept or confirm access by the system to each of these functions.

Select "Search for a device". A number indicates the profile of the Go to the Brand's website for more connection with the system: information (compatibility, more help, etc.). - 1 for media or 1 for telephone. Confirm with OK. - 2 for media and telephone.

A window is displayed with a search in progress message. Managing connections Indicates connection of the audio steaming profile. In the list of devices detected, select a The telephone connection automatically telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be includes hands-free operation and audio paired at a time. Indicates the hands-free telephone streaming. profile. The ability of the system to connect to just Completing the pairing one profile depends on the telephone. Both profiles may connect by default. Select a telephone. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code Confirm with OK. is the same in the system and in the Press the MENU button. telephone. Select "Connections". If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not restricted. A message appears in the screen confirming the pairing. Confirm with OK.

10 Bluetooth® audio system Then select and confirm: Select the "YES" tab in the screen Ending a call - "Connect telephone"/ using the buttons. "Disconnect telephone": In the "Telephone" menu. to connect/disconnect the Confirm with OK. Select "End call". telephone or the hands-free kit only. Confirm with OK to end the call. Press this button at the steering - "Connect media player"/ mounted controls to accept the call. "Disconnect media player": During a call, press one of these to connect/disconnect streaming buttons for more than two seconds. only. - "Connect telephone + media Making a call player"/"Disconnect telephone The system accesses the telephone's contacts + media player": In the "Telephone" menu. to connect/disconnect the directory, depending on its compatibility, and Select "Call". telephone (hands-free kit and while it is connected via Bluetooth. streaming). Select "Dial". - "Delete connection": to delete Or the pairing. With certain telephones connected by Select "Directory". Bluetooth you can send a contact to the Or directory of the audio system. When you delete a pairing in the system, Contacts imported in this way are saved remember to delete it from your telephone Select "Calls list". in a permanent directory visible to all, as well. whatever the telephone connected. Confirm with OK. The menu for the directory is not Confirm with OK. accessible if it is empty. Press this button for more than two seconds for access to your directory, then navigate using the Receiving a call thumb wheel. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen. . 11 Bluetooth® audio system Managing calls Telephone mode Consultation call

During a call, press OK to display In the contextual menu: From the contextual menu, select the contextual menu. - select "Telephone mode" to "Switch" and validate to return to a transfer the call to the telephone call left on hold. (for example, to leave the vehicle while continuing a conversation). Confirm with OK. - deselect "Telephone mode" to End call transfer the call to the vehicle. In the contextual menu, select "Hang up" to end the call. Directory Confirm with OK. To access the directory, press and Confirm with OK. hold SRC/TEL.

If the contact has been cut off, when you Select "Directory" to see the list of reconnect on returning to the vehicle, contacts. Microphone off the Bluetooth connection will be restored automatically and sound returned to the (so that the caller cannot hear) system (depending on the compatibility of the Confirm with OK. telephone). In the contextual menu: In some cases, the Telephone mode must be activated from the telephone. To modify the contacts saved in the - select "Micro OFF" to switch off system, press MENU then select the microphone. "Telephone" and confirm. - deselect "Micro OFF" to switch Interactive voice response Select "Directory management" the microphone on. and confirm. From the contextual menu, select You can: " " and confirm to use Confirm with OK. DTMF tones - "Consult an entry", the digital keypad to navigate in the - "Delete an entry", interactive voice response menu. - "Delete all entries".

Confirm with OK.

12 Bluetooth® audio system

The system accesses the Voice recognition requires the use of a telephone's contacts directory, Frequently asked questions compatible smartphone first connected to depending on its compatibility, and The following information groups together the the vehicle by Bluetooth. while it is connected via Bluetooth. answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system. With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the directory of the audio system. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all, whatever the telephone connected. The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.

Voice recognition This function allows you to use your smartphone's voice recognition via the system.

To start voice recognition, depending on the type of steering mounted controls:

Make a long press on the end of the lighting control stalk. OR Press this button. . 13 Bluetooth® audio system

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

With the engine off, the audio system switches When the engine is switched off, the audio Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the off after a few minutes of use. system operating time depends on the state of battery charge. charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.

The message "the audio system is overheated" In order to protect the installation if the Switch the audio system off for a few minutes appears on the display. surrounding temperature is too high, the audio to allow the system to cool. system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume.

Radio

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the audio Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, the different audio sources (radio, USB, etc.). settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted Loudness) can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. It is advisable sound sources, which can generate audible to set the audio functions (Bass, Treble, differences when changing source (radio, USB, Front-Rear Fader, Left-Right Balance) to the etc.). middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

The preset stations do not function (no sound, An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). waveband (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the stations are preset.

14 Bluetooth® audio system

The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I The radio station is not part of the regional Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic do not receive any traffic information. traffic information network. information.

The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the RDS function to allow the system gradually deteriorates or the station presets are the station or no transmitter is present in the to see if a more powerful transmitter is within not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. the geographic area. etc.). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment. including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer. example when going through an automatic car wash or in an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon mode. searches for another frequency giving better is too frequent and always on the same route. reception of the station.

Media

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The Bluetooth connection is cut. The battery of the peripheral device may not be Charge the battery of the peripheral device. sufficiently charged.

The message "USB device error" is displayed The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the USB memory stick. in the screen. The USB memory stick may be corrupt.

I am unable to play the music files on my Depending on the smartphone, access by the Manually activate the MTP profile on the smartphone via the USB port. audio system to music on the smartphone may smartphone (USB settings menu). have to be approved on the latter. . 15 Bluetooth® audio system Telephone

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

I am unable to access my voicemail. Few telephones or service providers allow the Call the voicemail, via the telephone menu, use of this function. using the number provided by your operator.

I am unable to access my directory of contacts. Check the compatibility of your telephone.

You did not give access to your contacts when Accept or confirm access by the system to the pairing the telephone. contacts on your telephone.

I am unable to continue a conversation when Telephone mode is activated. Deselect telephone mode to transfer the call to getting into my vehicle. the vehicle.

I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones (models, versions of operating Before starting the pairing procedure, delete systems) have their own specific aspects in the the pairing of the telephone from the system pairing procedure and some telephones are not and of the system from the telephone, so as to compatible. see the compatibility of the telephones.

16 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

PEUGEOT Connect Radio The different functions and settings described vary depending on the version and configuration of your vehicle.

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. The display of the Energy Economy Mode message signals that a change to standby is imminent. Multimedia audio system – Contents ® First steps 2 Applications – Bluetooth Steering mounted controls 3 telephone Menus 4 The link below gives access to OSS (Open Applications 5 Source Software) codes for the system. Radio 6 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 8 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ Media 9 Telephone 11 Settings 16 Frequently asked questions 18 . 1 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Selecting the audio source (depending on version): The touch screen is of the "capacitive" First steps - FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations. type. With the engine running, a press - Telephone connected via Bluetooth* and To clean the screen, use a soft, non- mutes the sound. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming). abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with With the ignition off, a press turns - CD player (depending on model). no additional product. the system on. - USB memory stick. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. - Media player connected via the auxiliary socket Do not touch the screen with wet hands. Adjustment of the volume. (depending on model).

* Depending on equipment. Use the buttons on either side of or below the touch screen for access to the menus, then Certain information is displayed permanently in press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. the upper band of the touch screen: - Reminder of the air conditioning information Depending on the model, use the "Source" or (depending on version), and direct access to "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen the corresponding menu. for access to the menus, then press the virtual - Reminder of the Radio Media and buttons in the touch screen. Telephone menu information. - Access to the Settings of the touch screen You can display the menus at any time by In the "Settings" menu you can create and digital instrument panel. pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. a profile for just one person or a group of people with common points, with the All of the touch areas of the screen are white. possibility of entering a multitude of Press in the grey zone to go back a level or settings (radio presets, audio settings, confirm. ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken Press the back arrow to go back a level or into account automatically. confirm.

2 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Radio: In very hot conditions, the volume may Steering mounted controls Short press: display the list of radio be limited to protect the system. It may go stations. – Type 2 into standby (screen and sound off) for at Long press: update the list. least 5 minutes Media: The return to normal takes place when Short press: display the list of the temperature in the passenger folders. compartment has dropped. Depending on model. Long press: display the available sorting options. Voice commands: This control is located on the Change audio source (radio; USB; steering wheel or at the end of the Steering mounted controls AUX if equipment connected; CD; lighting control stalk (depending on streaming). model). Steering mounted controls Short press, smartphone voice – Type 1 Confirm a selection. commands via the system.

Increase volume.

or Increase volume. Radio: Select the previous/next preset radio station. Select the previous/next item in a Mute/Restore the sound. Decrease volume. menu or a list. Or Media: Mute by pressing the volume or Select the previous/next track. increase and decrease buttons Select the previous/next item in a simultaneously. menu or a list. Mute/Restore sound by Restore the sound by pressing one simultaneously pressing the of the two volume buttons. increase and decrease volume buttons. . 3 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Decrease volume. Menus Radio Media or Depending on model/Depending on version Select an audio source or radio station. Air conditioning Manage various temperature and air Media (short press): change the flow settings. multimedia source. or Telephone (short press): start telephone call. Call in progress (short press): access telephone menu. Telephone (long press): reject an 18,5 21,5 incoming call, end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. Telephone Radio (rotate): previous/next preset. Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Media (rotate): previous/next track, Operate certain applications on or move in a list. Applications a smartphone connected via Short press: confirm a selection; if MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Access configurable equipment. nothing selected, access to presets. Auto.

Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received.

4 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Driving Applications Activate, deactivate or configure Viewing photos certain vehicle functions. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

The system can read folders and image files in the formats:.tiff;.gif;.jpg/jpeg;.bmp;.png. Settings

Configure a personal profile and/ Press Applications to display the or configure the sound (balance, primary page. ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, etc.). Navigation Press "Photos". Configure the guidance and select your destination via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Auto. Select a folder.

Select an image to view.

Press this button to display the details of the photo.

Press the back arrow to go back a level. . 5 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Managing messages Press one of the buttons for an Changing waveband automatic search for radio stations. Press Applications to display the Press Radio Media to display the primary page. primary page. Or Press "SMS". Move the cursor for a manual search Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the for frequencies up or down. secondary page. Press "Band" to change waveband. Select the "SMS" tab. Or Press the frequency. Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press this button to select the display settings for messages. Enter the FM and AM waveband values using the virtual keypad. Press this button to search for a contact. Presetting a station Press "OK" to confirm. Select a radio station or frequency.

Select the "Quick messages" tab. Make a short press on the star Radio reception may be affected by the outline. If the star is filled in, the use of electrical equipment not approved radio station is already preset. Press this button to select the by the Brand, such as a USB charger Or display settings for messages. connected to the 12 V socket. The external environment (hills, buildings, Select a radio station or frequency. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press "Preset". block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio This is a normal effect of the way in Make a long press on one of the which radio waves are transmitted and buttons to preset the station. Selecting a station does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment. Press Radio Media to display the primary page. 6 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Activating/Deactivating RDS Press Radio Media to display the Activate/Deactivate "TA". primary page. Press Radio Media to display the primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press in the grey zone to confirm. secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. Activate/Deactivate "News"/"Info".

Activate/Deactivate " ". RDS Press in the grey zone to confirm. Audio settings Press Radio Media to display the Press in the grey area to confirm. primary page.

Play TA messages Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page.

The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue The TA (Traffic Announcement) function Press "Audio settings". listening to the same station by automatically gives priority to TA alert messages. retuning to alternative frequencies. However, To operate, this function needs good in certain conditions, coverage of this RDS reception of a radio station that carries station may not be assured throughout the this type of message. While traffic Select the "Tone" or "Balance" entire country as radio stations do not cover information is being broadcast, the current or "Ringtones" or "Sound" tab to 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of media is automatically interrupted so that configure the audio settings. reception of the station during a journey. the TA message can be heard. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message. Press the back arrow to confirm. Display text information

The "Radio Text" function allows Press Radio Media to display the information transmitted by the radio primary page. station and related to the station or the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the song playing to be displayed. secondary page. . 7 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio DAB (Digital Audio FM-DAB Tracking settings, as well as Bass, Medium and Broadcasting) radio Treble are different and independent for "DAB" does not cover 100% of the each audio source. Terrestrial Digital Radio territory. In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers, When the digital radio signal is poor, and settings are the "FM-DAB Tracking" allows you to Driver Front only Digital radio provides higher quality common to all sources. continue listening to the same station, reception. In the " " tab, activate or deactivate by automatically switching to the Sound The different "multiplex/ensemble" " ", " corresponding FM analogue station (if Volume linked to speed Auxiliary services offer a choice of radio stations " and " ". there is one). input Touch tones arranged in alphabetical order.

Press Radio Media to display the Press Radio Media to display the primary page. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation primary page. with the Arkamys© system) is audio Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the processing that allows the quality of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. sound to be adapted according to the secondary page. number of passengers in the vehicle. Activate/Deactivate "FM-DAB Press "Waveband" to select the Tracking". "DAB band". Press in the grey zone to confirm. Onboard audio: the Arkamys© Sound Staging optimises the balance/distribution Press in the grey zone to confirm. of sound in the passenger compartment.

If "FM-DAB Tracking" is activated, there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to FM analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. When the digital signal quality becomes good, the system automatically switches back to "DAB".

8 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

The playlists are updated every time the If the "DAB" station being listened to is Selecting the source ignition is switched off or a USB stick is not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB connected. The lists are memorised: if they are Press Radio Media to display the Tracking" is not activated, the sound will not modified, the subsequent loading time will primary page. cut out while the digital signal is too weak. be shorter. Press the "SOURCES" button. Media Auxiliary socket (AUX) Choose the source. (depending on model/depending on equipment) USB port Bluetooth® audio streaming Streaming allows you to listen to music from your smartphone.

The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your system. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" If play does not start automatically, it may be Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings. necessary to start the audio playback from the connect the USB device to the USB port using smartphone. a suitable cable (not supplied). Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not Control is from the portable device or by using supplied). the system's touch buttons. To protect the system, do not use a USB First adjust the volume on your portable device hub. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your Once connected in Streaming mode, the audio system. smartphone is considered to be a media The system builds playlists (in temporary Display and management of the controls are source. memory), an operation which can take from via the portable device. a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. . 9 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Connecting Apple® players Information and advice It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using special characters Connect the Apple® player to the USB port (e.g. " "?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or The system supports USB Mass Storage using a suitable cable (not supplied). display problems. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® Play starts automatically. players via USB ports. The adapter cable Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format Control is via the audio system. is not supplied. (File Allocation Table). Device management is done by the audio system controls. It is recommended that the original USB Other devices, not recognised on The classifications available are those of cable for the portable device be used. connection, must be connected to the the portable device connected (artists/ auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/ supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, In order to be able to play a burned CDR or podcasts); you can also use a depending on compatibility. CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or classification structured in the form of a Joliet if possible when burning the CD. library. If the disc is burned in another format, it may The default classification used is by artist. not be played correctly. To modify the classification used, return It is recommended that the same burning to the first level of the menu then select standard be always used on an individual disc, the desired classification (playlists for To protect the system, do not use a USB with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) example) and confirm to go down through hub. for the best acoustic quality. the menu to the desired track. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the The audio equipment will only play audio files Joliet standard is recommended. with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between The version of software in the audio system 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. may not be compatible with the generation of It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. your Apple® player. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 standard. Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 kHz.

10 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

When connecting a smartphone As a safety measure, applications can Telephone to the system, it is recommended only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; TM that Bluetooth® be started on the MirrorLink smartphone display is interrupted once the vehicle is smartphone. connection moving.

As a safety measure and because it TM Telephone connected by requires sustained attention by the driver, The "MirrorLink " function requires a Bluetooth® using a smartphone when driving is compatible smartphone and applications. prohibited. From the system, press All operations must be done with the "Telephone" to display the primary vehicle stationary. page. Telephone not connected by Bluetooth® Press the "PHONE" button to display the The synchronisation of a personal secondary page. smartphone allows users to display Connect a USB cable. The Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the applications adapted for the smartphone's smartphone charges when application in the system. MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle connected by a USB cable. screen. From the system, press The processes and standards "Telephone" to display the primary Once the connection is established, a page are constantly changing. For the page. is displayed with the applications already communication process between the downloaded to your smartphone and adapted smartphone and the system to operate, Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the to MirrorLinkTM technology. it is essential that the smartphone be application in the system. Access to the different audio sources remains unlocked; update the operating system accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM of the smartphone as well as the date display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. and time of the smartphone and the Depending on the smartphone, it may be necessary Access to the menus for the system is possible system. to activate the "MirrorLink" TM function. For the list of eligible smartphones, go at any time using the dedicated buttons. to the Brand's internet website in your During the procedure, several country. screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. There may be a wait for the availability of Accept to start and complete the applications, depending on the quality of connection. your network. . 11 PEUGEOT Connect Radio CarPlay® smartphone Or Android Auto smartphone connection If the smartphone is already connection connected by Bluetooth®. As a safety measure and because it As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. smartphone charges when prohibited. All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary. vehicle stationary. From the system, press "Telephone" to display the primary The synchronisation of a personal page. On your smartphone, download the smartphone allows users to display Android Auto application. Press the "PHONE" button to go to the applications compatible with the secondary page. smartphone's CarPlay® technology on the vehicle screen when the smartphone's Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® function has been previously The synchronisation of a personal CarPlay® interface. activated. smartphone allows users to display As the processes and standards are applications adapted for the smartphone's Android Auto technology on the vehicle constantly changing, it is recommended screen. that you keep your smartphone's On connecting the USB cable, the The processes and standards operating system updated. CarPlay® function deactivates the For the list of eligible smartphones, go are constantly changing. For the system's Bluetooth® mode. to the Brand's internet website in your communication process between the country. smartphone and the system to operate, it is essential that the smartphone be ® You can go to the CarPlay unlocked; update the operating system Connect a USB cable. The navigation at any time by pressing of the smartphone as well as the date smartphone charges when the system's Navigation button. and time of the smartphone and the connected by a USB cable. system. For the list of eligible smartphones, go From the system, press Telephone to the Brand's internet website in your ® to display the CarPlay interface. country.

12 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

When connecting a smartphone ® As a safety measure, applications can Pairing a Bluetooth to the system, it is recommended only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; that Bluetooth® is started on the telephone display is interrupted once the vehicle is smartphone moving. As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile The "Android Auto" function requires the Telephone connected by Bluetooth® telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free use of a compatible smartphone and system of your audio system must be applications. From the system, press done with the vehicle stationary and the "Telephone" to display the primary ignition on. page. Telephone not connected by ® Bluetooth Press the "PHONE" button to display the secondary page. Connect a USB cable. The Activate the Bluetooth function on the smartphone charges when telephone and ensure that it is "visible to Press "Android Auto" to start the connected by a USB cable. all" (telephone configuration). application in the system.

From the system, press "Telephone" to display the primary Procedure from the telephone Different audio sources remain accessible in page. the margin of the Android Auto display, using Select the name of the system in the touch buttons in the upper bar. list of devices detected. Press "Android Auto" to start the Access to the menus for the system is possible application in the system. at any time using the dedicated buttons. In the system, accept the connection request Depending on the smartphone, it may be from the telephone. necessary to activate the "Android Auto" function. There may be a wait for the availability of To complete the pairing, whichever During the procedure, several applications, depending on the quality of procedure is used (from the telephone or screen pages relating to certain your network. from the system), ensure that the code functions are displayed. is the same in the system and in the Accept to start and complete the telephone. connection. . 13 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Procedure from the system Automatic reconnection The ability of the system to connect to just Press Telephone to display the To modify the connection profile: one profile depends on the telephone. primary page. All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the primary page. Press "Bluetooth search". The list of telephones detected is Press the "PHONE" button to go to the The services available depend on displayed. secondary page. the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices Press "Bluetooth connection" to used. Check the instructions for your Select the name of the chosen display the list of paired devices. telephone and with your service provider telephone in the list. for the services to which you have access.

Press the "details" button of a paired device. If the pairing procedure fails, it is The profiles compatible with the system recommended that you deactivate and are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, then reactivate the "Bluetooth" function in MAP and PAN. your telephone. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: Go to the Brand's website for more information Depending on the type of telephone, you - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). may be asked to accept or not the transfer only), of your contacts and messages. - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of the audio files on the telephone), - " ". Internet data Managing paired telephones On return to the vehicle, if the last Select one or more profiles. telephone connected is present again, it is This function allows the connection or automatically recognised and within about disconnection of a peripheral device as 30 seconds of switching on the ignition, well as the deletion of a pairing. the connection is established without any Press "OK" to confirm. action on your part (Bluetooth activated). Press Telephone to display the primary page.

14 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Press the "PHONE" button to go to the And Calling a contact secondary page. Make a long press Press Telephone to display the Press "Bluetooth connection" to primary page. display the list of paired devices. on the steering mounted PHONE Or make a long press button to reject the call. Press on the name of the telephone chosen in the list to disconnect it. Or Press again to connect it. Press "End call". on the steering mounted PHONE button.

Press "Contacts".

Deleting a telephone Making a call Select the desired contact from the list offered. Press the basket at the top right Using the telephone is not recommended Press "Call". of the screen to display a basket while driving. alongside the telephone chosen. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls. Press the basket alongside the Calling a recently used telephone chosen to delete it. number Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the primary page. Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the primary page. Or An incoming call is announced by a ring and a Make a long press superimposed display in the screen. Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Make a short press on the steering mounted PHONE button to accept Press "Call" to start the call. on the steering mounted button. an incoming call. . 15 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press "Recent calls". Press the back arrow again to Settings confirm. Select the desired contact from the list offered. Profile settings Press this button to initialise the It is always possible to make a call directly As a safety measure and because it profile selected. from the telephone; as a safety measure, requires the sustained attention of the first park the vehicle. driver, changes to settings must only be done with the vehicle stationary. Adjust brightness Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the primary page. Setting the ringtone primary page. Press Telephone to display the primary page. Press Brightness. Press "Profiles".

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. Move the cursor to adjust the Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" brightness of the screen and/or of Press "Ring volume" to display the or "Common profile". the instrument panel (depending on volume bar. version). Press this button to enter a name for Press in the grey zone to confirm. the profile using the virtual keypad. Press the arrows or move the cursor to set the ring volume. Press "OK" to save. Modifying system settings Press the back arrow to confirm. Press Settings to display the primary page. Press this button to activate the profile.

16 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press "Configuration" to go to the Press "Screen configuration". Press the back arrow to confirm. secondary page.

Press "System configuration". Press "Brightness". Setting the time Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or of Press Settings to display the Select "Units" to change the units of distance, the instrument panel (depending on primary page. fuel consumption and temperature. version). Press "Factory settings" to return to the initial Press "Animation". Press "Configuration" to go to the settings. secondary page. Activate or deactivate: "Automatic scrolling". Returning the system to factory settings Press " ". activates the English language by default Select "Animated transitions". Date and time (depending on version).

Press the back arrow to confirm. Select "System info" to display the versions of Select "Time". the different modules installed in the system. Press this button to adjust the time using the virtual keypad. Press the back arrow to confirm. Select the language

Press Settings to display the Press "OK" to save the time. primary page. Press Settings to display the primary page. Press "Configuration" to go to the Press this button to define the time secondary page. zone. Press "Configuration" to go to the secondary page. Select "Language" to change the Select the display format for the time language. (12h/24h). . 17 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Activate or deactivate Press the back arrow to save the synchronisation with GPS (UTC). date.

Press the back arrow to save the Select the display format of the date. settings.

Press the back arrow again to confirm. The system does not automatically manage the change between winter and summer time (depending on the country of sale). Adjustment of the time and date is only available if "GPS Synchronisation" is deactivated. Setting the date The change between winter and summer Press Settings to display the time is done by changing the time zone. primary page.

Press "Configuration" to go to the secondary page. Frequently asked questions Press "Date and time". The following information groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

Select "Date". Press on this button to define the date.

18 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Radio

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the upper band to enable the system to check not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in etc.). the geographical area.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment. including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer. example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the received stations. name in the list. "Radio" page. The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets these details as the station name.

. 19 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Media

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick. catalogue time).

Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.

Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device. launch playback.

Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.

20 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Telephone

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth switched off or the telephone may not be switched on. visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).

The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).

The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings. order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.

. 21 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Settings

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical When changing the ambience setting, the ambience. treble and bass settings are reset.

When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. When changing the distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.

There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio sound sources, which can generate audible functions to the middle position. differences when changing source.

When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start the engine to increase the charge of the after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of battery. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system automatically goes into energy economy mode and switches off to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.

22 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

PEUGEOT Connect Nav The different functions and settings described vary depending on the version and configuration of your vehicle.

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. The display of the Energy Economy Contents Mode message signals that a change to GPS satellite navigation – standby is imminent. Applications – Multimedia First steps 2 ® Steering mounted controls 3 audio system – Bluetooth Menus 3 telephone Voice commands 5 The link below gives access to OSS (Open Navigation 11 Source Software) codes for the system. Connected navigation 13 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ Applications 16 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ Radio 21 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 22 Media 23 Telephone 25 Settings 29 Frequently asked questions 32 . 1 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive" 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 type. With the engine running, a press To clean the screen, use a soft, non- mutes the sound. abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with With the ignition off, a press turns no additional product. the system on. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Adjustment of the volume. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Certain information is displayed permanently in Use the buttons either side of or below the Selecting the audio source (depending on the upper band of the touch screen: touch screen for access to the menus, then version): - Reminder of the air conditioning information press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. - FM/DAB*/AM* radios. (depending on version), and direct access to - USB memory stick. Depending on the model, use the "Source" or the corresponding menu. - CD Player (depending on model). "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen - Go directly to the selection of the audio - Media player connected via the auxiliary for access to the menus, then press the virtual source, to the list of radio stations (or list of socket (depending on model). buttons in the touch screen. titles depending on the source). - Telephone connected via Bluetooth and - Go to the message notifications, emails, Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming). You can display the menus at any time by map updates and, depending on the pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. services, the navigation notifications. - Go to the settings for the touch screen and All of the touch areas of the screen are white. the digital instrument panel. Press the cross to go back a level. Press "OK" to confirm.

* Depending on equipment. 2 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Increase volume. Radio (rotate): automatic search for In the "Settings" menu you can create the previous/next station. a profile for just one person or a group or Media (rotate): previous/next track, of people with common points, with the or move in a list. possibility of entering a multitude of Short press: confirm a selection; if settings (radio presets, audio settings, nothing selected, access to presets. navigation history, contact favourites, Mute/Restore the sound. etc.); these settings are taken into account Or automatically. Mute by pressing the volume or increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. Radio: display the list of stations. Restore the sound by pressing one Media: display the list of tracks. In very hot conditions, the volume may of the two volume buttons. Radio (press and hold): update the be limited to protect the system. It may go list of stations received. into standby (screen and sound off) for at least 5 minutes The return to normal takes place when Decrease volume. the temperature in the passenger Menus or compartment has dropped. Depending on model/Depending on version

Air conditioning Manage various temperature and air Media (short press): change the flow settings. Steering mounted controls multimedia source. Depending on model Telephone (short press): start or telephone call. Voice commands: 23 °C 12:13 Call in progress (short press): This control is located on the access telephone menu. steering wheel or at the end of the Telephone (long press): reject an lighting control stalk (depending on incoming call, end call; when no call model). is in progress, access telephone 18,5 21,5 Short press, system voice menu. commands. Long press, smartphone voice commands via the system. . 3 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Connected navigation 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Telephone Enter navigation settings and Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, choose a destination. read messages and emails and send or Use services available in real time, or quick messages. depending on equipment.

23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

Radio Media Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs. or

Applications 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Settings Operate certain applications on Configure a personal profile and/ FM/87.5 MHz a smartphone connected via or configure the sound (balance, ® TM 87.5MHz or CarPlay , MirrorLink or Android ambience, etc.) and the display or Auto. (language, units, date, time, etc.). Check the state of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi connections.

4 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Voice commands First steps Steering mounted controls Example of a "voice command" for navigation: Pressing this button activates the "Navigate to address, 11 Regent voice commands function. Street, London". Example of a "voice command" for the radio and media: "Play artist, Madonna". To ensure that voice commands are Example of a "voice command" for always recognised by the system, please the telephone: observe the following recommendations: "Call David Miller". Vehicle - speak in a normal tone without breaking up words or raising your Activate, deactivate or configure voice. The voice commands, with a choice of certain vehicle functions. - always wait for the "beep" (audible 12 languages (English, French, Italian, or signal) before speaking. Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese, - for best operation, it is recommended Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic, that the windows and sunroof Brazilian), are made using the language be closed to avoid extraneous previously chosen and set in the system. 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 interference (depending on version). For some voice commands, there are - before making a voice command, ask alternative synonyms. other passengers not to speak. Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/... The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate to address" and "Display POI in the city" are not available.

. 5 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Information – Using the system Global voice commands

Press the Push To Talk voice command button and tell me These commands can be made from any what you'd like after the tone. screen page after pressing the "Voice Remember you can interrupt command" or "Telephone" button located me at any time by pressing on the steering wheel, as long as there is this button. If you press it no telephone call in progress. again while I'm waiting for you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to undo something, say Voice commands Help messages "undo". And to get information and tips at any time, just say "help". If you ask me to do Help There are lots of topics I can help you with. something and there's some You can say: "help with phone", "help with information missing that I need, Voice command help navigation", "help with media" or "help with I'll give you some examples radio". For an overview on how to use voice or take you through it step by Navigation help controls, you can say "help with voice controls". step. There's more information available in "beginner" mode. Radio help You can set the dialogue mode Media help to "expert" when you feel comfortable. Telephone help

Set dialogue mode as <...> Choose "beginner" or "expert" mode.

Select profile <...> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.

Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" and we'll start that again. No

6 PEUGEOT Connect Nav "Navigation" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover, say command" or "Telephone" button located "navigate to" and then the address or contact on the steering wheel, as long as there is Navigate to work name. For example, "navigate to address 11 no telephone call in progress. Regent Street, London", or "navigate to contact, Navigate to preferred address <...> John Miller". You can specify if it's a preferred Navigate to contact <…> or recent destination. For example, "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", "navigate to Navigate to address <...> recent destination, 11 Regent Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate home". To see Show nearby POI <...> points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury" or "show nearby petrol station". For more information you can ask for "help with route guidance".

Remaining distance To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", Remaining time "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help with navigation" to learn more commands. Arrival time

Stop route guidance

Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system. . 7 PEUGEOT Connect Nav "Radio Media" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice Tune to channel <…> You can pick a radio station by saying "tune command" or "Telephone" button located to" and the station name or frequency. For on the steering wheel, as long as there is example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to no telephone call in progress. 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say "tune to preset number". For example "tune to preset number five".

What's playing To display the details of the current "track", "artist" and "album", you can say "What's playing".

Play song <...> Use the command "play" or "listen to" to select the type of music you'd like to hear. You can Play artist <...> pick by "song", "artist", or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play Play album <...> song, Hey Jude", or "play album, Thriller".

Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection.

8 PEUGEOT Connect Nav "Telephone" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued Call contact <...>* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by from any main screen page after pressing the contact name, for example: "Call David the "Telephone" button on the steering Dial <...>* Miller". You can also include the phone type, wheel, as long as there is no telephone for example: "Call David Miller at home". To Display contacts* call in progress. make a call by number, say "dial" followed If there is no telephone connected by Display calls* by the phone number, for example, "Dial Bluetooth, a voice message announces: 07,776,835,417". You can check your voicemail "Please first connect a telephone", and the Call (message box | voicemail)* by saying "call voicemail". To send a text, voice session will be closed. say "send quick message to", followed by the contact, and then the name of the quick message you'd like to send. For example, "send quick message to David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of calls, say "display calls". For more information on SMS, you can say "help with texting".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done. . 9 PEUGEOT Connect Nav "Text message" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued Send text to <...> To hear your messages, you can say "listen to from any main screen page after pressing most recent message". When you want to send the "Telephone" button on the steering Listen to most recent message* a text, there's a set of quick messages ready wheel, as long as there is no telephone for you to use. Just use the quick message call in progress. name and say something like "send quick If there is no telephone connected by message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the Bluetooth, a voice message announces: phone menu for the names of the supported "Please first connect a telephone", and the messages. voice session will be closed. Please say "call" or "send quick message to", and then select a line from the list. To move around a list shown on the display, you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or "previous page". To undo your selection, say "undo". To cancel the current action and start again, say "cancel".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done.

The system only sends pre-recorded "Quick messages".

10 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press "OK" to start navigation. Navigation Zoom out/zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen. Choice of a destination Select "Position" to visualise the arrival To a new destination In order to be able to use the navigation, it point geographically. Press Navigation to display the is necessary to fill in the "City", the "Street" primary page. and the "Number" on the virtual keyboard or or take it from the list in "Contact" or in the "History" of addresses. To "My home" or "My work"

Press the "MENU" button to go to the Press Navigation to display the primary page. secondary page. Without confirmation of the street number, you will be guided to one end of the street. or Select "Enter address".

Press the "MENU" button to go to the Select the "Country". To a recent destination secondary page. Select "My destinations". Press Navigation to display the Enter the "City", the "Street" and the primary page. " " and confirm by pressing Number or Select the "Preferred" tab. on the suggestions displayed. Select "My home". Press "OK" to select the "Guidance criteria". Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page. And/Or Or Select "See on map" to select the Select "My destinations". Select "My work". "Guidance criteria".

Select the "Recent" tab. Or Press "OK" to start navigation. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a preset favourite destination. the "Guidance criteria". . 11 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Towards a contact Select "Points of interest". Press this button to start navigation.

Press Navigation to display the Or primary page. Select the "Travel", or "Leisure" or "Commercial" or "Public" or Press this button to save the or "Geographic" tab. address displayed.

Or Press the "MENU" button to go to the Select "Search" to enter the name A long press on an item opens a list of secondary page. and address of a POI. POIs nearby. Select "My destinations". Press "OK" to start calculation of the route. Towards GPS coordinates Select the "Contact" tab. Press Navigation to display the Select a contact in the list to start navigation. To a point on the map primary page. or Press Navigation to display the primary page. Towards points of interest or Explore the map by sliding a finger on the (POI) screen. Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Press this button to display the world categories. screen. map. Using the grid, select by zoom the Select the destination by pressing on the map. Press Navigation to display the desired country or region. primary page. or Tap the screen to place a marker Press this button to enter the GPS and display the sub-menu. coordinates.

Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page. 12 PEUGEOT Connect Nav A marker is displayed in the middle TMC (Traffic Message Network connection provided by of the screen, with the "Latitude" the user and "Longitude" coordinates. Channel)

TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages are linked to a European Press this button to start navigation. standard on the broadcasting of traffic information via the RDS system on FM radio, transmitting traffic information in Connected navigation Or real time. connection The TMC information is then displayed Press this button to save the on a GPS Navigation system map and address displayed. As a safety measure and because it taken into account straight away during requires sustained attention by the driver, navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic using a smartphone when driving is OR jams and closed roads. prohibited. Press this button to enter the value All operations must be done with the for "Latitude" using the virtual vehicle stationary. keypad. The display of danger zones depends on the legislation in force and subscription to And the service. For access to connected navigation, you Press this button to enter the value can use the connection provided by the for "Longitude" using the virtual vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance keypad. call" services or use your smartphone as Connected navigation a modem. Depending on version Activate and enter settings for sharing Depending on the equipment level of the the smartphone connection. vehicle Network connection provided by the vehicle

OR . 13 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Network connection provided by Restrictions of use: The processes and standards the vehicle - With CarPlay®, connection sharing is are constantly changing; for the The system is automatically only with a Wi-Fi connection. communication process between the TM connected to the modem included - With MirrorLink , connection sharing smartphone and the system to work for the "Emergency or assistance is only with a USB connection. correctly, we recommend that you calls" services and does not require The quality of services depends on the update the operating system of the a connection provided by the user quality of the network connection. smartphone as well as the date and via their smartphone. time of the smartphone and the system.

Network connection provided by With the arrival of "TOMTOM the user TRAFFIC", the services are Settings specific to available. connected navigation USB connection

Connect a USB cable. In the "Settings" menu you can create The smartphone charges when The services offered with connected a profile for just one person or a group connected by a USB cable. navigation are as follows. of people with common points, with the A Connected Services pack: possibility of entering a multitude of - Weather, settings (radio presets, audio settings, Bluetooth connection - Filling stations, navigation history, contact favourites, Activate the Bluetooth function on - Car park, etc.); these settings are taken into account the telephone and ensure that it is - Traffic, automatically. visible to all (see the "Applications" - POI local search. section). A Danger zone pack (option).

Wi-Fi connection Press Navigation to display the primary page. Select a Wi-Fi network found by the or system and connect to it (see the "Applications" section).

Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page.

14 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Select "Settings". The display of danger zones depends on "Danger zones" pack the legislation in force and subscription to updates the service. Press Settings to display the Select " ". Map primary page.

Activate or deactivate: Declaration of "Danger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the - "Allow declaration of danger secondary page. zones". zones" - "Guidance to final destination To distribute information on the Select "System settings". on foot" declaration of danger zones, you should - "Authorise sending check the option: " information" Allow declaration of These settings must be made danger zones". Select the "System info" tab. according to each profile. Press Navigation to display the Select "View" to display the versions primary page. Select "Alerts". of the different modules installed in or Activate or deactivate "Warn of the system. danger zones". Select "Update(s) due". Press the " Select this button. Declare a new danger zone" button located in the upper bar of the touch screen

Activate: Give an audible warning You can download the system and map updates from the Brand's website. Select the option "Type" to choose the type of "danger zone". The update procedure can also be found on the website. For access to connected navigation, you have to select the option: "Authorise Select the "Speed" option and enter sending information". it using the virtual keypad.

Press "OK" to save and distribute the information. . 15 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Displaying the weather Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay®, Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. Press Navigation to display the Internet Browser primary page. or Press Applications to display the primary page. Applications or Press Applications to display the Press this button to display the list of primary page. services. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet or Browser" function.

Select "View map". Press "Internet Browser" to display the Press "Applications" to display the browser home page. applications home page.

Select your country of residence. Select "Weather". CarPlay® smartphone Press "OK" to save and start the connection browser. Press this button to display primary As a safety measure and because it information. requires sustained attention by the driver, Connection to the internet is via one of using a smartphone when driving is the network connections provided by the prohibited. Press this button to display the vehicle or the user. All operations must be done with the detailed weather information. vehicle stationary. Connectivity

The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will Press Applications to display the be the maximum temperature for the day. primary page. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will or be the minimum temperature for the night.

16 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

From the system, press The synchronisation of a personal The synchronisation of a personal "Applications" to display the smartphone allows users to display smartphone allows users to display or primary page. applications compatible with the applications adapted for the smartphone's smartphone's CarPlay® technology on the MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle vehicle screen when the smartphone's screen. Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay® CarPlay® function has been previously The processes and standards function. activated. are constantly changing. For the As the processes and standards are Press "CarPlay" to display the communication process between the constantly changing, it is recommended CarPlay® interface. smartphone and the system to operate, that you keep your smartphone's it is essential that the smartphone be operating system updated. unlocked; update the operating system For the list of eligible smartphones, go of the smartphone as well as the date to the Brand's internet website in your On connecting the USB cable, the and time of the smartphone and the country. CarPlay® function deactivates the system. system's Bluetooth® mode. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the Brand's internet website in your Connect a USB cable. The country. smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection As a safety measure, applications can Press on "Telephone" to display the only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; CarPlay® interface. display is interrupted once the vehicle is or As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, moving. using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. Or All operations must be done with the The MirrorLinkTM function requires the Connect a USB cable. The vehicle stationary. use of a compatible smartphone and smartphone charges when applications. connected by a USB cable. When connecting a smartphone to the system, it is recommended that Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone. . 17 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Connect a USB cable. The There may be a wait for the availability of As a safety measure, applications can smartphone charges when applications, depending on the quality of only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; connected by a USB cable. your network. display is interrupted once the vehicle is From the system, press moving. "Applications" to display the or primary page. Android Auto smartphone connection The "Android Auto" function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLinkTM As a safety measure and because it applications. function. requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the prohibited. smartphone charges when application in the system. All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable. vehicle stationary. Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press TM "Applications" to display the necessary to activate the MirrorLink Synchronising a personal smartphone function. or primary page. In the process, several screen allows users to display applications pages relating to certain functions adapted for the smartphone's Android Auto technology on the vehicle screen. are displayed. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android The processes and standards Accept to start and complete the Auto" function. connection. are constantly changing. For the communication process between the Press "Android Auto" to start the Once connection is established, a page smartphone and the system to operate, application in the system. is displayed with the applications already it is essential that the smartphone be downloaded to your smartphone and adapted unlocked; update the operating system to MirrorLinkTM technology. of the smartphone as well as the date During the procedure, several and time of the smartphone and the screen pages relating to certain Access to the different audio sources remains system. functions are displayed. accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM For the list of eligible smartphones, go Accept to start and complete the display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. to the Brand's internet website in your connection. Access to the menus for the system is possible country. at any time using the dedicated buttons.

18 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Different audio sources remain accessible in Select "Search". Activate the Bluetooth function on the the margin of the Android Auto display, using The list of telephones detected is telephone and ensure that it is "visible to touch buttons in the upper bar. displayed. all" (telephone configuration). Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons. If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended Procedure from the telephone that you deactivate and then reactivate the Select the system name in the list of Bluetooth function in your telephone. devices detected. In Android Auto mode, the function to display the menus by pressing the screen Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list. briefly with three fingers is deactivated. In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.

Depending on the type of telephone, you To complete the pairing, whichever may be asked to accept or not the transfer There may be a wait for the availability of procedure is used (from the telephone or of your contacts and messages. applications, depending on the quality of from the system), ensure that the code your network. is the same in the system and in the telephone. Connection sharing Bluetooth connection® The system offers to connect the telephone Procedure from the system with 3 profiles: - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone As a safety measure and because they Press Applications to display the only), require prolonged attention on the part primary page. - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of of the driver, the operations for pairing or of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the audio files on the telephone), the Bluetooth hands-free system of your - "Mobile internet data". audio system must be carried out with the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. secondary page.

Press "Bluetooth connection". . 19 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Select the "Secured" or "Not Select the "Activation" tab to activate or The "Mobile internet data" profile secured" or "Stored" tab. deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection. must be activated for connected navigation (where the vehicle does not And/Or Select a network. have "Emergency and assistance call" Select the "Settings" tab to change the name services), having first activated sharing of of the system network and the password. this connection on your smartphone. Using the virtual keypad, enter the Press "OK" to confirm. "Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the "Password". Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to start the connection. To protect against unauthorised access and make your systems as secure as Press "OK" to confirm. possible, the use of a complex security code or password is recommended. The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive. Wi-Fi connection Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi. Managing connections Wi-Fi connection sharing Press Applications to display the Press Applications to display the Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the primary page. primary page. system. or or Press Applications to display the primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the or secondary page. secondary page. Select "Manage connection". Select "Wi-Fi network Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the connection". secondary page. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". With this function you can view the access to connected services, the availability of connected services and modify the connection mode. 20 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Enter the values using the virtual Make a long press on one of the Radio keypad. buttons to preset the station. Selecting a station First enter the units then click on the decimals zone to enter the figures Press Radio Media to display the after the decimal point. primary page. Activating/Deactivating RDS or Press "OK" to confirm. Press Radio Media to display the primary page. or Press "Frequency". Radio reception may be affected by the Press one of the buttons for an use of electrical equipment not approved automatic search for radio stations. by the Brand, such as a USB charger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the connected to the 12 V socket. secondary page. The external environment (hills, buildings, Or tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Select "Radio settings". Move the cursor for a manual search block reception, including in RDS mode. for frequencies up or down. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and Select "General". does not indicate any failure of the audio Activate/Deactivate "Station Or equipment. follow". Press Radio Media to display the primary page. Press "OK" to confirm. or Presetting a station RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Select a radio station or frequency. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the listening to the same station by automatic (refer to the corresponding section) secondary page. retuning to alternative frequencies. However, Press "Presets". in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS Select "Radio stations" in the station may not be assured throughout the secondary page. entire country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss Press "Frequency". of reception of the station during a journey. . 21 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Displaying text information Playing TA messages Press Radio Media to display the primary page.

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function or The "Radio Text" function allows gives priority to TA alert messages. information transmitted by the radio To operate, this function needs good station and related to the station or the reception of a radio station that carries Select the audio source. song playing to be displayed. this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast, the current media is automatically interrupted so that Press "Band" to select the "DAB" waveband. Press Radio Media to display the the TA message can be heard. Normal primary page. play of the media previously playing is or resumed at the end of the message. DAB-FM auto tracking

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select "Announcements". "DAB" does not cover 100% of the secondary page. territory. Activate/Deactivate "Traffic When the digital radio signal is poor, announcement". Select "Radio settings". "DAB-FM tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, Press "OK" to confirm. by automatically switching to the corresponding FM analogue station (if Select "General". there is one).

Activate/Deactivate "Display radio DAB (Digital Audio text". Broadcasting) radio Press Radio Media to display the primary page. Press "OK" to confirm. Terrestrial Digital Radio or Digital radio provides higher quality reception. The different "multiplex/ensemble" Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the services offer a choice of radio stations secondary page. arranged in alphabetical order.

22 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Select "Radio settings". Media Auxiliary socket (AUX) USB port (depending on model/depending on equipment) Select "General". Activate/Deactivate "Station follow".

Press "OK".

This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" If "DAB-FM tracking" is activated, there Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings. is a difference of a few seconds when the connect the USB device to the USB port using system switches to FM analogue radio a suitable cable (not supplied). Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.) with sometimes a variation in volume. to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not Once the digital signal quality is restored, supplied). the system automatically changes back To protect the system, do not use a USB First adjust the volume of your portable device to "DAB". hub. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system. The system builds playlists (in temporary Operation of controls is via the portable device. memory), an operation which can take from If the "DAB" station being listened to is a few seconds to several minutes at the first CD player not available on FM ("DAB-FM" option connection. greyed out), or "DAB-FM tracking" is not Reduce the number of non-music files and the (depending on model/depending on equipment) activated, the sound will cut out while the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. digital signal is too weak. The playlists are updated every time the Insert the CD in the player. ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified, the subsequent loading time will be shorter. . 23 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Selecting the source Connecting Apple® players Information and advice Press Radio Media to display the Connect the Apple® player to the USB port The system supports USB mass storage primary page. using a suitable cable (not supplied). devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® Play starts automatically. or players via USB ports. The adapter cable is not supplied. Control is via the audio system. Device management is done by the audio Select "Source". system controls. Other devices, not recognised on The classifications available are those of connection, must be connected to the Choose the source. the portable device connected (artists/ auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/ supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, ® podcasts). depending on compatibility. Bluetooth audio streaming The default classification used is by Streaming allows you to listen to music from artists. To modify the classification used, your smartphone. return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first for example) and confirm to go down adjust the volume on your portable device (to a through the menu to the desired track. To protect the system, do not use a USB high level). hub. Then adjust the volume of your audio system. If play does not start automatically, it may be The audio equipment will only play audio files necessary to start the audio playback from the with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" telephone. The version of software in the audio system file extensions and with a bit rate of between Control is from the portable device or by using may not be compatible with the generation of 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. the system's touch buttons. your Apple® player. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma Once connected in streaming mode, the 9 standard. telephone is considered to be a media The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and source. 48 kHz.

24 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 Procedure from the system characters, without using special characters Telephone Press Telephone to display the (e.g. " "?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or Pairing a Bluetooth® display problems. primary page. telephone or Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format (File Allocation Table). As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the Press "Bluetooth search". driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile It is recommended that the original USB telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free cable for the portable device be used. system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the Or In order to be able to play a burned CDR or ignition on. Select "Search". CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or The list of telephones detected is Joliet if possible when burning the CD. displayed. If the disc is burned in another format, it may not be played correctly. Activate the Bluetooth function on the It is recommended that the same burning telephone and ensure that it is "visible to If the pairing procedure fails, it is standard is always used on an individual disc, all" (telephone configuration). recommended that you deactivate and with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) then reactivate the Bluetooth function in for the best acoustic quality. your telephone. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Procedure from the telephone Select the name of the chosen Joliet standard is recommended. Select the system name in the list of telephone in the list. devices detected.

In the system, accept the connection request Connection sharing from the telephone. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: To complete the pairing, whichever - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone procedure is used (from the telephone or only), from the system), ensure that the code - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of is the same in the system and in the the audio files on the telephone), telephone. - "Mobile internet data". . 25 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Go to the Brand's website for more information Activation of the profile; "Mobile internet secondary page. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). data" is obligatory for connected navigation having first activated sharing of Select "Bluetooth connection" to this connection on your smartphone. display the list of paired devices. Managing paired telephones

Press the "details" button. Select one or more profiles. This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing. Press "OK" to confirm. Select one or more profiles. Press Telephone to display the Depending on the type of telephone, you Press "OK" to confirm. primary page. may be asked to accept or not the transfer or of your contacts and messages. The ability of the system to connect to just Automatic reconnection one profile depends on the telephone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the All three profiles may connect by default. secondary page.

On return to the vehicle, if the last Select "Bluetooth connection" to telephone connected is present again, it is display the list of paired devices. automatically recognised and within about The services available depend on 30 seconds of switching on the ignition, the network, the SIM card and the the connection is established without any compatibility of the Bluetooth devices Press on the name of the telephone action on your part (Bluetooth activated). used. Check the instructions for your chosen in the list to disconnect it. telephone and with your service provider Press again to connect it. for the services to which you have access. To modify the connection profile: Press Telephone to display the The profiles compatible with the system primary page. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, or MAP and PAN.

26 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Deleting a telephone Making a call Or make a long press Select the basket at top right of the Using the telephone is not recommended screen to display a basket alongside while driving. the telephone chosen. on the steering mounted PHONE Park the vehicle. button. Make the call using the steering mounted controls. Press the basket alongside the Select "Contact". telephone chosen to delete it. Calling a new number Select the desired contact from the list offered. Receiving a call Select "Call". Press Telephone to display the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a primary page. superimposed display in the screen. or Make a short press on the steering Calling a recently used mounted PHONE button to accept number Enter the phone number using the an incoming call. Press Telephone to display the digital keypad. primary page. And or Make a long press Press "Call" to start the call.

Or on the steering mounted PHONE Make a long press button to reject the call. Calling a contact Press Telephone to display the Or primary page. on the steering mounted button. Select "End call". or

Select "Calls". Select the desired contact from the list offered. . 27 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

It is always possible to make a call directly Managing messages Access to "Messages" depends on the from the telephone; as a safety measure, compatibility of the smartphone and the Press Telephone to display the first park the vehicle. integral system. primary page. Depending on the smartphone, access to or your messages or email may be slow.

Managing contacts/entries Press the " " button to go to the OPTIONS The services available depend on secondary page. the network, the SIM card and the Press Telephone to display the Select "Messages" to display the list compatibility of the Bluetooth devices primary page. of messages. used. Check in the manual for your smartphone or and with your service provider for the Select the "All" or "Sent" or services available to you. "Incoming" tab. Select "Contact".

Select "Create" to add a new Select the detail of the message contact. chosen in one of the lists. Managing quick messages

In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone Press Telephone to display the Press "Answer" to send a quick numbers for the contact. primary page. message stored in the system. In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for or the contact. Press "Call" to start the call. In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the for the contact. secondary page.

Press " Play" to hear the message. Select "Quick messages" to display The "Email" function allows email the list of messages. addresses to be entered for a contact, but the system is not able to send emails.

28 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival" Select the "Incoming" or "Sent" or Or or "Not available" or "Other" tab "Not read" tab. "Voice". with the possibility of creating new messages. Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Or "Ringtone". Press "Create" to write a new message. Press " Play" to start playing the Press "OK" to save the settings. message.

Select the message chosen in one The balance/distribution (or spatialisation of the lists. Access to "Email" depends on the with the Arkamys© system) is audio compatibility of the smartphone and the processing that allows the quality of the integral system. sound to be adapted according to the Press "Transfer" to select the number of passengers in the vehicle. addressee(s). Available only with the front and rear Settings speakers configuration.

Press " Play" to start playing the Audio settings message. The Ambience (6 optional ambiences) Press to display the Settings and Bass, Medium and Treble audio primary page. settings are different and independent for or each audio source. Managing email Activate or deactivate "Loudness". Press Telephone to display the The settings for "Position" (All Select "Audio settings". primary page. passengers, Driver and Front only) are common to all sources. or Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", Select "Ambience". "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary input". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Or secondary page. "Position". Onboard audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging Select "Email" to display the list of Or optimises the balance/distribution of messages. "Sound". sound in the passenger compartment. . 29 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Profile settings Insert a USB memory stick containing Or the photograph in the USB port. "Sound". Select the photograph. As a safety measure and because it Or requires the sustained attention of the Press "OK" to accept the transfer of "Voice". driver, changes to settings must only be the photograph. done with the vehicle stationary. Or Press "OK" again to save the " ". settings. Ringtone Press Settings to display the primary page. Press "OK" to save the settings. or The location for the photograph is square; the system reshapes the original photograph if in another format. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Modifying system settings secondary page. Press this button to initialise the Press Settings to display the Select "Setting of the profiles". profile selected. primary page. or Initialisation of the profile selected Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" activates the English language by default. or "Common profile". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. Press this button to enter a name for Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the the profile using the virtual keypad. "Audio settings" with it. Select "Screen configuration".

Select "Audio settings". Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Animation".

Press this button to add a Select "Ambience". Activate or deactivate: "Automatic photograph to the profile. scrolling". Or Select "Brightness". "Balance".

30 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Move the cursor to adjust the Select the language Press "OK" to confirm. brightness of the screen and/or of the instrument panel. Press Settings to display the Select the display format of the date. primary page. Press Settings to display the or primary page. or Adjustment of the time and date is only Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the available if "GPS synchronisation" is secondary page. deactivated. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the The change between winter and summer secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the time is done by changing the time zone. language. Select "System settings".

Setting the date Setting the time Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the fuel consumption and temperature. primary page. primary page. Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial or or settings.

Returning the system to factory settings Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the activates the English language by default. secondary page. secondary page.

Select "Setting the time-date". Select "Setting the time-date".

Select "System info" to display the versions of the different modules installed in the system. Select "Time". Select "Date". Press this button to adjust the time Press on this button to define the using the virtual keypad. date. . 31 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Colour schemes".

Press this button to define the time zone. Select a colour scheme in the list then press "OK" to confirm. Select the display format for the time (12h/24h).

Activate or deactivate Every time the colour scheme is changed, synchronisation with GPS (UTC). the system restarts, temporarily displaying a black screen.

Press "OK" to confirm. Frequently asked questions The system does not automatically The following information groups together the manage the change between winter and answers to the most frequently asked questions summer time (depending on country). concerning your audio system.

Colour schemes

As a safety measure, the procedure for changing the colour scheme is only possible when the vehicle is stationary.

Press Settings to display the primary page. or

32 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Navigation

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with Check the route settings in the "Navigation" the current location (exclusion of toll roads on menu. a toll road).

The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.

The audible warning of "Danger zones" does The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation" not work. is too low. menu and check the voice volume in the audio settings.

The system does not suggest a detour around The guidance criteria do not take account of Select the setting for the "Traffic info" function an incident on the route. TMC messages. in the list of route settings (Without, Manual or Automatic).

I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on When not navigating, the system announces all Zoom in on the map to see the exact position my route. "Danger zones" positioned in a cone located in of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for no longer receive alerts other than navigation "Danger zones" located on nearby or parallel instructions or to reduce the time for the roads. announcement.

Certain traffic jams along the route are not On starting, it is several minutes before the Wait until the traffic information is being indicated in real time. system begins to receive the traffic information. received correctly (display of the traffic information icons on the map).

In certain countries, only major routes This is perfectly normal. The system is (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic dependent on the traffic information available. information. . 33 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may Wait until the system has started up completely take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 so that there is GPS coverage by at least satellites correctly. 4 satellites.

Depending on the geographical environment This behaviour is normal. The system is (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of dependent on the GPS signal reception reception of the GPS signal may vary. conditions.

My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical Check that the connected services are areas, the connection may be unavailable. activated (settings, contract).

Radio

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the short-cut menu to enable the system to check not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in etc.). the geographical area.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not basement car parks, etc.) block reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment. including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer. example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

34 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio stations received. name in the list. stations" secondary menu. The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets these details as the station name.

Media

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick. catalogue time).

The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Check that the CD is inserted in the player the not contain audio files or contains audio files of right way up. a format not recognised by the audio system. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot The CD has been recorded in a format that is be played if it is too badly damaged. not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). Check the content in the case of a recorded The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system CD: consult the advice in the "AUDIO" section. not recognised by the audio system. The audio system CD does not read DVDs. Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not be read by the audio system. . 35 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

There is a long waiting period following the Upon insertion of a new media, the system This is perfectly normal. insertion of a CD or connection of a USB reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, memory stick. artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.

The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.

The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without unsuitable. selecting an ambience.

Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.

Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device. launch playback.

Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.

36 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Telephone

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth switched off or the telephone may not be switched on. visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).

The sound of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, telephone communication. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).

Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display synchronising the contacts on the SIM card, telephone contacts". the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronisations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.

The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings. order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.

The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the system. . 37 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Settings

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical When changing the ambience setting, the ambience. treble and bass settings are reset.

When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. When changing the distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.

There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different the sources listened to. It is recommended that sound sources, which can generate audible the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance) differences when changing source. be adjusted to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start then vehicle’s engine to increase the after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of charge of the battery. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system automatically goes into energy economy mode and switches off to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.

The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting. if the synchronisation with the satellites is Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS deactivated. synchronisation" (UTC).

38 Alphabetical index A B ABS ...... 87 Battery...... 181, 186, 215, 217,218 Checking the engine oil level...... 24-25 Accessories...... 47, 84, 113 Battery, charging...... 216,217 Checking the levels...... 184,186 Active lane keeping assistance...... 20, 150, 156 Battery, remote control...... 44-46 Checking tyre pressures Active Safety Brake...... 16, 146, 148 Bicycle carrier...... 47 (using the kit)...... 194, 196,200 AdBlue®...... 16, 25, 188,189 Blanking screen (snow shield)...... 173,175 Checks...... 183, 186,188 Additive, Diesel...... 14-15, 186,187 Blind, panoramic roof...... 71 Checks, routine...... 186,188 Adjusting headlamps...... 79-80 Blind spot detection...... 156 Child lock...... 107 Adjusting head restraints...... 51 Blind spot sensors...... 154,155 Children...... 104 Adjusting seat...... 51-53 BlueHDi...... 25, 188, 220 Children (safety)...... 107 Adjusting the air distribution...... 67-69 Bluetooth (hands-free)...... 9-10, 13-14, 25-26 Child seats...... 91, 95-96, 100,101, 107 Adjusting the air flow...... 66-69 Bluetooth (telephone)...... 13-15, 25-27 Child seats, conventional...... 100 Adjusting the date...... 30-32, 38, 18, 31 Bonnet...... 183 Child seats, ISOFIX...... 102, 104,105 Adjusting the lumbar support...... 52 Boot...... 40, 47 Closing the boot...... 40, 47 Adjusting the seat angle...... 52 Boot lamp...... 62 Closing the doors...... 40, 42-43, 46 Adjusting the temperature...... 66-69 Brake discs...... 187,188 Commercial version...... 233 Adjusting the time...... 30-32, 38, 17, 31 Brake lamps...... 209,210 Configuration, vehicle...... 30-34, 36 Advice on driving...... 109,110 Brakes...... 10, 187,188 Connection, Bluetooth...... 10, 13-15, 19, 25-27 Airbags...... 18, 92, 94, 99 Braking, automatic emergency...... 16, 146, 148 Connection, MirrorLink...... 11-12, 17 Airbags, curtain...... 93-94 Braking, dynamic emergency...... 114,117 Connection, Wi-Fi network...... 20 Airbags, front...... 93-94, 99 Braking assistance system...... 86 Control, back-up boot release...... 47 Airbags, lateral...... 93-94 Brightness...... 16 Control, back-up door opening...... 44-45 Air conditioning...... 6, 65, 65-66 Bulbs...... 205 Control, electric windows...... 50 Air conditioning, automatic...... 67-69 Bulbs (changing)...... 205,206, 209,210 Control, heated seats...... 53 Air conditioning, manual...... 66-67, 69-70 Controls, steering mounted...... 122,126 Air vents...... 64 Control stalk, lighting...... 74 Alarm...... 48-49 Control stalk, wipers...... 80-81, 83 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)...... 86-87 Courtesy lamps...... 72 Anti-pinch...... 50, 71 C Cover, load space...... 61-63 Anti-slip regulation (ASR)...... 87 Cable, audio...... 9, 23 Cruise control.....130, 132,133, 135,141, 144,145 Anti-theft/Immobiliser...... 44 Cable, Jack...... 9, 23 Cruise control, adaptive...... 139 Apple CarPlay connection...... 12, 16 Cap, fuel filler...... 170,171 Cruise control, adaptive with Armrest...... 58 Capacity, fuel tank...... 170,171 Stop function...... 132,133, 138,141, 144 Armrest, front...... 59-60 CD...... 9, 23-24 Cruise control by speed limit Armrest, rear...... 61 CD, MP3...... 9, 23-24 recognition...... 132,133 Assistance, emergency braking...... 86-87, 148 Central locking...... 40, 42-43 Cup holder...... 58 Assistance call...... 85-86 Changing a bulb...... 205,206, 209,210 Audio streaming (Bluetooth)...... 9, 9, 24 Changing a fuse...... 211,214 Changing a wheel...... 193,194, 201,202 Changing a wiper blade...... 81-82 Changing the remote control battery...... 45-46 . 235 Alphabetical index D G DAB (Digital Audio Electronic stability control (ESC)...... 86 Gauge, fuel...... 170,171 Broadcasting) – Digital radio...... 6-7, 8, 22 Electronic stability control (ESC)...... 86-87, 89 Gearbox, automatic...... 6, 22, 118,129, 187 Date (setting)...... 30-32, 38, 18, 31 Emergency braking assistance (EBA)...... 86 Gearbox, electronic...... 6 Daytime running lamps...... 74, 76, 206, 208 Emergency call...... 85-86 Gearbox, manual...... 6, 118, 128,130, 187 Deactivating the passenger airbag...... 93, 99 Emergency switching off...... 113 Gear lever...... 6 Deactivation of DSC...... 88 Emissions control system, SCR...... 188 Gear lever, automatic gearbox...... 119,123, 125 Deadlocking...... 40-42 Energy economy mode...... 181 Gear lever, manual gearbox...... 118 Defrosting...... 66, 70-71 Engine, Diesel...... 17, 172, 220, 227,230 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear Demisting...... 66, 70 Engine, petrol...... 172, 183, 222,226 efficiency indicator...... 127 Demisting, rear...... 55 Engine compartment...... 183 Glove box, refrigerated...... 58 Demisting, rear screen...... 55 Engines...... 221,230 G.P.S...... 12 Denon (audio system)...... 63 Environment...... 6, 46 Dimensions...... 231,232 Dipstick...... 24-25, 184,185 Direction indicators...... 79, 206, 208,210 Display screen, instrument panel...... 127 H Display screen, multifunction F Hazard warning lamps...... 62, 84-85 (with audio system)...... 30-32 Fatigue detection...... 149 Hazard warning lamps, automatic operation...85 Distance Alert...... 16, 146,147 Filling the AdBlue® tank...... 190,191 Headlamp adjustment...... 79-80 Doors...... 46 Filling the fuel tank...... 170,172 Headlamps, automatic dipping...... 21, 76-78 Driver’s attention warning...... 149 Filter, air...... 186,187 Headlamps, automatic illumination.....74, 76, 78 Driver Sport Pack...... 126,127 Filter, Diesel fuel...... 184 Headlamps, dipped beam...... 21, 206,207 Driving abroad...... 75 Filter, oil...... 187 Headlamps, halogen...... 79, 205,207 Driving economically...... 6 Filter, particle...... 186,187 Headlamps, main beam...... 21, 206,208 Driving positions (storing)...... 53 Filter, passenger compartment...... 65, 186,187 Headlamp wash...... 81 DSC...... 87 Fitting a wheel...... 202, 204,205 Head restraints, front...... 51 Dynamic (sport)...... 126,127 Fitting roof bars...... 182 Head restraints, rear...... 57-58 Dynamic pack...... 126,127 Fittings, boot...... 62 Heating...... 6, 64, 66-67, 69 Dynamic stability control (DSC)...... 18, 86-89 Fittings, interior...... 58 Hill start assist...... 117,118 Flap, fuel filler...... 170,171 Horn...... 86 Foglamp, rear...... 74-75, 209,210 Horn...... 86 Foglamps, front...... 74-75, 207 Foglamps, rear...... 20, 74 E Folding the rear seats...... 57-58 Earth point, remote...... 183 Frequency (radio)...... 21-22 EBA...... 87 Fuel...... 6, 172 I EBFD...... 86-87 Fuel consumption...... 6 Identification, vehicle...... 233 Eco-driving (advice)...... 6 Fusebox, engine compartment...... 214 Ignition...... 69, 112,113, 28 Economy mode...... 181 Fuses...... 211,214 Ignition on...... 113 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD).... 86-87 Immobiliser, electronic...... 44, 110 Indicator, AdBlue® range...... 25 236 Alphabetical index L Indicator, coolant temperature...... 23-24 Labels, identification...... 233 Messages, quick...... 28 Indicator, engine oil level...... 24-25 LEDs – Light-emitting diodes...... 76 Mirror, rear view...... 56 Indicator lamps, operation...... 10 Level, brake fluid...... 185 Mirrors, door...... 55, 154,155 Indicator lamps, status...... 10 Level, Diesel additive...... 186,187 Misfuel prevention...... 171 Indicators, direction...... 79 Level, engine coolant...... 23-24, 185,186 Mountings, ISOFIX...... 102, 103 Inflating tyres...... 188 Level, engine oil...... 24-25, 184,185 Inflating tyres (using the kit)...... 194, 196, 200 Level, headlamp wash...... 81, 186 Instrument panel...... 8 Level, screenwash fluid...... 81, 186 Intelligent Traction Control...... 87 Levels and checks...... 183,186 Internet browser...... 16 Light-emitting diodes – LEDs...... 76 N ISOFIX...... 104 Lighting...... 73 Net, high load retaining...... 64 ISOFIX mountings...... 102,103 Lighting, ambient...... 73 Number plate lamps...... 211 Lighting, exterior...... 74 Lighting, guide-me home...... 40, 78 Lighting, interior...... 72-73 Lighting, welcome...... 78-79 J Lighting dimmer...... 28 O Jack...... 193,194, 201, 9, 23 Loading...... 6, 182 Oil, engine...... 184,185 Jump starting...... 215 Load reduction mode...... 181 Oil change...... 184,185 Locating your vehicle...... 40 Oil consumption...... 184,185 Locking...... 44 On-board tools...... 193,194 Long objects, transporting...... 61 Opening the bonnet...... 183 Low fuel level...... 170,171 Opening the boot...... 40-41, 47 K Luggage retaining strap...... 62 Opening the doors...... 40-41, 46 Key...... 39-42, 44-46 Lumbar...... 52, 54 Key, electronic...... 41-43 Keyless Entry and Starting.... 41- 42, 44, 112,113 Key not recognised...... 113 Key with remote control...... 40, 42, 110 P Kit, hands-free...... 9-10, 13-14, 25-26 M Pads, brake...... 187,188 Kit, temporary puncture Maintenance, routine...... 6 Paint colour code...... 233 repair...... 62, 193,194, 196,200 Map reading lamps...... 72 Panoramic glass roof...... 71 Markings, identification...... 233 Parcel shelf, rear...... 61-62 Massage function...... 54 Park Assist...... 161,162, 164 Mat...... 59 Parking brake...... 114, 187,188 Memorising a speed...... 130 Parking brake, electric...... 12-14, 18-19, 114,117 Menu...... 12 Parking sensors, front...... 156,157 Menu, main...... 4 Parking sensors, rear...... 156,157 Menus (audio)...... 4-5, 3-5 PEUGEOT Connect Nav...... 1 Messages...... 28 PEUGEOT Connect Radio...... 1 Plates, identification...... 233 . 237 Alphabetical index

Player, Apple®...... 9, 10, 24 Replacing the passenger Ski flap...... 61 Player, MP3 CD...... 23 compartment filter...... 186,187 Snow chains...... 167, 173 Player, USB...... 7, 9, 23 Reservoir, headlamp wash...... 186 Socket, 12 V accessory...... 58, 60, 62 Port, USB...... 58, 60, 7, 9, 23 Reservoir, screenwash...... 186 Socket, 220 V...... 60 Pre-heater, Diesel...... 17 Resetting the service indicator...... 23-24 Socket, 230 V...... 58 Pressures, tyres...... 188, 197, 205, 233 Resetting the trip recorder...... 27-28 Socket, auxiliary...... 8, 9, 23 Pre-tensioning seat belts...... 91 Reversing camera...... 158 Socket, Jack...... 58, 8, 9, 23 Priming pump...... 220 Reversing lamp...... 209,210 Sockets, audio...... 60 Priming the fuel system...... 220 Roof bars...... 182 Speed limiter...... 130, 132,135 Profiles...... 16, 30 Running out of fuel (Diesel)...... 220 Speed limit recognition...... 131,132 Protecting children...... Spotlamps, door mirror...... 79 93, 95-96, 99, 101, 102, 104, 105, 107 Starting a Diesel engine...... 172 Puncture...... 194, 196,200 Starting the engine...... 110,111 Starting the vehicle...... S 12-14, 18-19, 112,113, 119,126 Safety, children.... 3, 95-96, 99, 101, 104, 105, 107 Starting using another battery...... 113, 215 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)...... 187 Station, radio...... 4, 6, 21-22 R SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)...... 188 Stay, bonnet...... 183 Radio...... 4-5, 6, 9, 21, 24 Screen, cold climate...... 173,174 Steering mounted controls, audio...... 2-3, 3, 3 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Screen, instrument panel...... 28-29 Stop & Start...... Broadcasting – DAB)...... 6, 8, 22 Screen, monochrome...... 30-32 20, 30, 66, 70, 128, 130, 171, 183, 186, 215, 217 Range, AdBlue...... 25-26 Screen, multifunction (with Stopping the vehicle...... RDS...... 7, 21-22 audio system)...... 30-32, 4 12-14, 18-19, 112,113, 119,126 Rear screen, demisting...... 70-71 Screen menu map...... 12 Storage...... 58-62 Recharging the battery...... 216,217 Screenwash...... 81 Storage wells...... 62 Recirculation, air...... 67-69 Screenwash, rear...... 81 Storing driving positions...... 53 Reduction of electrical load...... 181 Seat, rear bench...... 56-58 Stowing rings...... 62 Regeneration of the particle filter...... 187 Seat belts...... 11, 90-91, 100 Sunshine sensor...... 65 Reinitialisation of the under- Seats, electric...... 52-53 Switching off the engine...... 110,111 inflation detection system...... 167 Seats, front...... 51-53 Synchronising the remote control...... 45-46 Reinitialising the remote control...... 45-46 Seats, heated...... 53 Reminder, key in ignition...... 112 Seats, rear...... 56-58 Remote control...... 39-44 Selector, gear...... 122,126 Removing a wheel...... 202, 204,205 Serial number, vehicle...... 233 Removing the mat...... 59 Service indicator...... 23 Replacing bulbs...... 205,206, 209,210 Servicing...... 6, 23 Replacing fuses...... 211,213 Settings, equipment...... 30-34, 36 Replacing the air filter...... 186,187 Settings, system...... 16, 30 Replacing the oil filter...... 187 Sidelamps...... 76, 206, 208,210 Side repeater...... 208 238 Alphabetical index T U Tables of engines...... 222, 230 Under-inflation (detection)...... 166 Tables of fuses...... 211, 214 Unlocking...... 40-41 Tank, fuel...... 170, 171 Updating the date...... 38, 18, 31 Technical data...... 222, 230 Updating the time...... 38, 17, 31 Telephone...... 9-10, 12, 13-16, 25-29 USB...... 60, 7, 9, 23-24 Telephone, Bluetooth with voice recognition...... 13 Temperature, coolant...... 23-24 Three flashes (direction indicators)...... 79 Time (setting)...... 30-32, 38, 17, 31 V TMC (Traffic info)...... 13 Ventilation...... 6, 64-67, 69 Tools...... 193, 193,194, 201 Voice commands...... 5-10 Top tether...... 102 Total distance recorder...... 27-28 Touch screen...... 32, 168, 1, 1 Touch screen...... 34, 36 Towball, quickly detachable...... 175,180 W Towed loads...... 221 Warning and indicator lamps...... 9 Towing another vehicle...... 218,219 Warning lamp, airbag...... 18 Towing device...... 89, 109,110, 174 Warning lamp, braking system...... 10 Towing device with quickly Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater...... 17 detachable towball...... 175,180 Warning lamp, low fuel level...... 11 Towing eye...... 62 Warning lamp, parking brake...... 10 Traction control (ASR)...... 18, 86-89 Warning lamp, Service...... 12 Traffic information (TA)...... 5 Warning lamps...... 9-10 Traffic information (TMC)...... 13 Warnings and indicators...... 10 Trailer...... 89, 109,110, 174 Weights...... 221 Trailer stability assist (TSA)...... 89 Wheel, spare...... 62, 188, 193,194, 201,202 Trajectory control systems...... 86-87 Window controls...... 50 Triangle, warning...... 62 Wiper, rear...... 81 Trip computer...... 28-30 Wiper blades (changing)...... 81-82 Trip distance recorder...... 27-28 Wipers...... 20, 80, 83 Tyres...... 6, 188 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive...... 81, 83 Tyre under-inflation detection.... 14, 166, 168, 197 . 239

Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by application Reproduction or translation of all or part of of the provisions of the European legislation this document is prohibited without written (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT. Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Printed in the EU Anglais 03-18 www.peugeot.com *18308.0040* ANG. 18308.0040